JP2016073497A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest by using an operation means.SOLUTION: A performance control means executes a predetermined performance based on the fact that a first operation means or a second operation means is operated in an operation promoting performance for pressing operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in a variable performance. In the operation promoting performance, operation of a first operation type, or operation of a second operation type differing from the first operation type is pressed as operation to the first operation means, operation of a third operation type, or operation of a fourth operation type differing from the operation of the third operation type is pressed as operation to the second operation means, a ratio of pressing the operation to the first operation type is allowed to differ from a ratio of pressing the operation to the second operation type, and a ratio of pressing the operation to the third operation type is allowed to differ from a ratio of pressing the operation to the fourth operation type.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game, operation means that can be operated by a player, such as an effect button and an operation lever, are provided, and the operation means is operated during an operation valid period in which the operation on the operation means is valid. Based on the above, there are many that execute a predetermined effect.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, an operation validity notification that the button operation is valid is performed during the push button operation valid period, and the push button is pressed during the operation valid period. There is described a gaming machine that executes an accessory act of moving an accessory (movable member). This Patent Document 1 describes that a stick controller may be used as an operation means instead of a push button.

  Further, in Patent Document 2, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation during the effective operation period of the effect button is performed, and the operation state of the effect button is different from the normal state (projection state, retracted state, rotation state). State or vibration state), and a specific operation corresponding effect by a specific effect image, effect sound, or lamp emission is executed based on the operation of the effect button.

JP 2014-46107 A JP 2013-233453 A

  However, in this way, when a predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, the operation type of the operation that is valid is determined according to the predetermined effect to be executed.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player using an operation means.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition (main CPU). When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game and the first operation means (effect button ( Or a first effect button or the like)) and a second operation means (operation lever (or second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means and the determination result by the determination means. A game machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a change effect using an effect symbol for notifying the player, wherein the effect control means is the first operation means or the second operation in the change effect. hand A predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect that prompts the user to perform an operation of the first operation means. An operation of one operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is prompted, and an operation of the third operation type or an operation of the third operation type is performed as an operation for the second operation means. A ratio of prompting an operation of the fourth operation type different from the ratio of prompting an operation of the first operation type and a ratio of prompting an operation of the second operation type, and a ratio of prompting an operation of the third operation type The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type is different.

  In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention, wherein the operation promotion effect includes, as an operation for the first operation means, Only the operation of the first operation type is prompted, and the operation for the second operation means has an operation promotion effect that prompts only the operation of the fourth operation type.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the player using the operation means.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a big win, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determining table for winning a small winner, (c) is a special symbol determining table for losing FIG. (A) is a figure showing a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure showing a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the first jackpot game, and (c) is a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the second jackpot game. (D) is a figure showing the 3rd big hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a small hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing the big winning game opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 1-30th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 31st-74th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 75th-84th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a regular variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. (E) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting opening-and-closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is a diagram of the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows an effect mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode D. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the variation effect of effect mode A. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode B. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode C. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. The figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for loss of effect mode A, and the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for jackpot and small hits of effect mode A is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. The figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for loss of effect mode B, and the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for jackpot and small hits of effect mode B is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. The figure which extracted and comprised a part of special production type determination table of the variation production pattern for loss of production mode C, and a part of the special production type determination table of the variation production pattern for big hits and small hits of the production mode C. is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. The figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect type determination table of the variation effect pattern for loss of effect mode D, and the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for jackpot and small hits of effect mode D is there. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the variation effect of effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 38 shows an operation type determination table for effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table of effect mode B. FIG. FIG. 38 shows an operation type determination table for effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table of effect mode C. FIG. 38 shows an operation type determination table for effect mode C. It is a figure showing a special effect information table of effect mode D. FIG. 38 shows an operation type determination table for effect mode D.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “this embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guidance member 29 </ b> D having a guidance path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Also, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. In addition, a second winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9 and 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a for detecting game balls. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 6 is provided below the image display device 14 at the lower part of the game area 2A and is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable large winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). In other words, the jackpot special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is determined.

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold A hold display device comprising a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10. In the normal symbol lottery, a winning random number value is acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10, and it is determined whether or not the acquired winning random number value is a random value corresponding to “win”. This is the process to do.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, even if a game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and the special symbol variation display is performed. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each of the start ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device is the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect accessory device 1701, the second effect accessory device 1702, and the third effect use. It is comprised with the accessory apparatus 1703. FIG. An image display device 14, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the effect lighting device are provided. 16 is provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The first effect accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. The second effect accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. The third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each effect accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Accordingly, the first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to “operation position 1-1” (the position of the center of the front surface of the image display device 14). Move to (position after movement). The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via “operation position 1-1”. To do. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” and then returns to “standby position 1”, or from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, a movement operation is performed such as returning to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum. 14 is moved to “operation position 2” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface of 14. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 2” (original position) A moving operation such as returning is performed.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the third decorative member 17C falls to the right side from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the position on the lower left side of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum. It moves to “operation position 3” (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands on the left side with the lower side of the third decorative member 33c as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
Note that any of the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c is not limited to the shape and operation mode described here.

  In addition, the saucer 50 is provided with a first effect button device 18 and a second effect button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects and pachilog games (including bonus games) described later. Yes.

  The first effect button device 18 includes a first effect button 18A as an operable “first operation means”, a first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 that detects a pressing operation on the first effect button 18A, and a first effect button. A protrusion state detection switch 18a21 for detecting that 18A is held at the maximum special operation position described later is provided (see FIG. 3).

The first effect button 18A includes a non-projecting state (FIG. 2A) in which the first effect button 18A is a normal operation position, and a protruding state (FIG. 2 (FIG. 2) b)) and the state when detecting the pressing operation can be changed to a state (FIG. 2 (c)) withdrawn downward from the non-projecting state.
In the non-projecting state, the first effect button 18A is a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
Further, in the protruding state, the first effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) above the non-projecting state from the surface around the tray 50.
Further, the first effect button 18A is slightly lowered from the surface around the saucer 50 and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the first effect button device 18 has a structure in which the first effect button 18A can be changed into a non-projecting state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state or the projecting state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and when the pressing operation is subsequently released, the pressed state returns to the non-projecting state.

  The direction in which the first effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the protruding state, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is the forward / backward direction of the first effect button 18A. To do.

  When the first effect button 18A is in a state where a pressing operation is detected, the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 detects that the first effect button 18A has been completely pressed. A signal is output to the lamp control board 104.

  Further, when the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state, a protruding state detection signal indicating that the protruding state detection switch 18a21 is held at the position where the first effect button 18A protrudes to the maximum (the position in the protruding state) is generated. Output to the lamp control board 104.

  Moreover, the first effect button 18A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the first effect button 18A to the outside, and the first effect button 18A is illuminated.

  The second effect button device 19 is provided on the left side of the first effect button device 18, and is connected to the second effect button 19A as an operable “second operation means” and the second effect button 19A. And a second effect button operation detection switch 19a for detecting a pressing operation on the second effect button 19A (see FIG. 3).

  The second effect button 19A has an upper part 191A, a left part 192A, a lower part 193A, a right part 194A, and a central part 195A. The entire top surface of the second effect button 19A including the upper portion 191A, the left portion 192A, the lower portion 193A, the right portion 194A, and the central portion 195A is provided so as to be able to be pressed down in a state of slightly protruding from the tray 50. .

  Further, the second effect button 19A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the second effect button 19A to the outside, and the second effect button 19A is illuminated.

In the second effect button 19A, the light emission mode changes between an operation effective period in which an operation on the second effect button 19A is enabled and a period other than that.
For example, the lighting state of the second effect button 19A changes between the operation effective period and other periods. For example, the second effect button 19A is in a “lighting state” that is lit in any color during the operation effective period, and is in a “non-lighting state” that is not lit in other periods. Further, for example, the second effect button 19A is “a state in which it is lit in a specific color (for example, red)” in the operation effective period, and “in a color different from the operation effective period (for example, blue) in other periods”. "Lighting state".

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a is a second effect button operation detection signal indicating that the second effect button 19A has been pressed on the lamp control board 104 when the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs the second effect button operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the second effect button operation detection signal.

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a includes an upper operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the upper portion 191A, a left operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the left portion 192A, and a lower operation that detects a pressing operation of the lower portion 193A. The switch includes a detection switch, a right operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the right portion 194A, and a center operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the center portion 195A (not shown).

  When the detection switches of the upper part 191A, the left part 192A, the lower part 193A, the right part 194A, and the central part 195A in the second effect button operation detection switch 19a detect the pressing operation, respectively, the upper operation detection signal, the left part operation detection signal, The lower operation detection signal, the right operation detection signal, and the center operation detection signal are output to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. The upper operation detection signal, the left operation detection signal, the lower operation detection signal, and the right operation detection signal are collectively referred to as a “second effect button operation detection signal”.

  In the present embodiment, a state where the operation for the first effect button 18A as the “first operation means” or the second effect button 19A as the “second operation means” is validated is an “operation valid state”. That's it. The sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute a predetermined effect by operating an operation means that enables the operation in the “operation effective state”.

Examples of the “operation effective state” include an “operation effective state” which is a predetermined period set in advance, and an “operation effective state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
As an example of the predetermined condition, as will be described later, the designation operation execution flag is set by pressing the first effect button 18A once in the standby state in which the sub CPU 102a is not executing the game effect. Is set on. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid state for validating the operation on the second effect button 19A based on the designation operation execution flag being set to ON.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The special effect symbol stop display is performed in response to the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, the special effect symbol change display and stop display are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative design that represents numbers). In the variation display of the special effect design, the special decoration design in each column moves (variation display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of special effect symbols is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the special effect design stop display, the above-mentioned three rows of special decoration designs are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal structure of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are detected via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 20-25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  A first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protruding state detection switch 18a21, and a second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the first effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position, the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 indicates that the first effect button 18A is pressed on the lamp control board 104. 1 Production button operation detection signal is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs a first effect button operation detection signal input from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 to the effect control board 102.

  The protruding state detection switch 18a21 outputs a protruding state detection signal to the lamp control board 104 when the first effect button 18A is positioned in the protruding state. The lamp control board 104 outputs the protruding state detection signal input from the protruding state detection switch 18a21 to the effect control board 102.

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a is a second effect button operation detection signal indicating that the second effect button 19A has been pressed on the lamp control board 104 when the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs the second effect button operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the second effect button operation detection signal.

  The sub CPU 102a receives the command output from the main control board 101, the first effect button operation detection signal output from the first effect button device 18, the second effect button operation detection signal, the protruding state detection signal, and the second effect button. Based on the selection button detection signal output from the device 19, the input signal from the timer (quartz crystal unit), etc., the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on this arithmetic processing, the lamp A command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launching device 4. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a controls the drive of the electric motor 18b for moving the first effect button 18A of the first effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command, and the first effect button device. Emission control for causing the 18 LEDs 1821d to emit light is performed.

  A first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protruding state detection switch 18a21, and a second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  The lamp control board 104 has a first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protrusion state detection signal from the protrusion state detection switch 18a21, or a first effect button operation detection switch 18a11. When the effect button operation detection signal is input, the input detection signal is output to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 detects the first effect button operation detection signal, the protruding state detection signal, and the second effect button operation detection between the effect control board 102 and the first effect button device 18 and the second effect button device 19. Relay the signal.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and sound output to the sound output device 15. A sound generation unit 105C that generates and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  4A and 4B are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second start port 7.

  Each of the jackpot determination tables is a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in a relatively high state (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the jackpot game with the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is “small win”, the small win game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, in the variation effect as the special drawing lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit. As a reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned special-figure decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. (A part of the production symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and if a predetermined special figure decoration symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, it becomes an arrangement of special figure decoration symbols representing the winning of the jackpot There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called “super-reach production”) that increases the expectation of winning a big win may or may not be developed. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit without reaching a reach state. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination.

  Each special symbol determination table stores a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the special effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variable display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310).

  The special effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

  Regarding the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second is displayed. The special symbol display device 21 indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect symbol designating command”, and the special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect symbol designating command”. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 6B to FIG. 6D are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game used when the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 is controlled. FIG. 6B is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is a period from the start of the small hit game until the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening The opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of the small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a big prize opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 is controlled. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8 are the round number (R), the special electric action number (K) that is the opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80), and the big prize. The opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the mouth 8 are set.

  FIG. 8A shows an example of a game condition data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is low (low probability game). Status). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start opening prize ease that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning ease after the jackpot game is set to easy (short time gaming state), and if it is “00H”, the starting port winning ease is difficult after the jackpot game (non-short time gaming state). ).

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag indicating the game condition (high probability flag and time-short flag) and the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of special symbol variable display according to the newly set game conditions. Note that the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of determinations for jackpot determination.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, the main CPU 101a, when executing the jackpot game, is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state) after the jackpot game ends. A specific gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state) is set.
The main CPU 101a ends the specific gaming state when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be performed) reaches 84 times in this specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state). Yes. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special symbol variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are diagrams showing examples of special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 1st to 30th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the special symbol variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is the 31st to 74th times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special variation pattern in the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when winning the third jackpot, or that is referenced when winning the small bonus Description of the special figure variation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) in the main ROM 101c and confirms the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the short time flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation display is confirmed, and the special figure fluctuation is determined according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuations. Select the pattern determination table.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 1 to 31 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 31 to 74 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table in FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 75 to 84 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, or when winning a small win, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device that operates in the special symbol display (the start port related to the special symbol display), and the special symbol The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining presence / absence of reach, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern are stored.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H”, or “20H”, “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired in response to entering the ball 7 is compared with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data. To decide.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (losing), the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure pending number (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination process. . The main CPU 101a obtains a random number for reach determination, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), or the special figure variation pattern of “unreach without reach”, Alternatively, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach”.

  Although the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the special figure hold number, when determining whether the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach without reach” or the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach” is determined. Does not refer to “4” as the number of reserved balls.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “unreach without reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “unreach without reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “losing with reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “losing with reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 102a determines the special symbol variation pattern by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”). The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  The main CPU 101 a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expected degree of reliability (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The degree of expectation (reliability) to be won is associated with the first jackpot and the second jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the contents of the effect based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as will be described later. In addition, in the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the variation effect effect type determined by the sub CPU 102 a is described in association with the special diagram variation pattern designation command as a reference. ing.

  Here, as the effect contents, here, “symbol variation” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special performance symbols that inform the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effects symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when the combination of special effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying the jackpot, the two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7”, and the remaining special effect symbols are displayed. It means an aspect in which the production symbol is changing. The “temporary stop” refers to an aspect in which the special effect symbol is changed to the player because the special effect symbol is slightly shaken or deformed.

  In the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 9, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are “lost” as the determination result of the jackpot determination without being in the reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that informs. The “symbol variation 1” is a “shortening variation” performed in a very short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. The “symbol variation 2” and “symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  In addition, the “normal reach” shown in FIG. 9 stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that performs reach effects.

  Further, “normal reach → story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that variably displays a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, story reach is performed as a reach production with a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach. This story reach suggests that the decision result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the jackpot by going out on a journey to find the dog that disappeared in the following challenge reach, and finding the dog at the end It is a reach production consisting of a story of the contents.

  Further, “pseudo-ream 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This “pseudo-ream 2 → challenge reach” stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special performance symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol change including two pseudo-reams. The character that appears in Story Reach also challenges the treasure hunt game in which a target item is searched for from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character wins the item to determine that the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or jackpot It is a challenge reach with the content of suggesting.

  Further, “Pseudo-ream 3 → Challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after the symbol variation including three pseudo-reams.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which a normal reach for stop display is performed, and then a super reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the normal reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which normal reach for stop display is performed, and then special reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a special reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first jackpot whose stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H0CH ”, the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot whose stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H07H ”, the selection ratio decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach” of “variation presentation pattern A034” to “variation presentation pattern A037”. And “E6H0BH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “Normal reach → Special reach” of “Change effect pattern A038” to “Change effect pattern A041” is changed. When “E6H0CH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” is determined. Decided to run To.

Later, variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” will be described as variation effects of effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
When the expectation degree for the big hit of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” is described, as can be seen from the selection ratio of “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, and “E6H0CH” described above. “Variation effect pattern A034” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Fluctuation effect of“ normal reach → special reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives“ E6H0BH ” As the “pattern A038” and “variable effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases.

  Further, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state have special diagram variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special symbol variation times are represented by “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time for execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the “special pattern variation pattern 30” for executing the “symbol variation 1” with the shortest special symbol variation time of 2 seconds is the special diagram variation time 4 shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of “special pattern fluctuation pattern 00” for executing “symbol fluctuation 1” in seconds.

  In addition, “symbol variation → special character reach 1” to “symbol variation → special character reach 6” shown in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B, which will be described later, after symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This is a fluctuating production with special character reach. Details of the special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, in the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 11, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are variation effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed, and the variation effects corresponding to the special diagram variation time. The production time is different.

  In addition, “symbol variation → attack reach 1” to “symbol variation → attack reach 6” shown in FIG. 11 is an attack reach in which different characters attack each other after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special performance symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect to perform. Details of this attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special figure fluctuation pattern for executing an extremely short fluctuation effect such as a special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, "Janken production (losing 1)" to "Janken production (losing 6)", "Janken production (win 1)" to "Janken production (win 3)", "Janken production (Aiko 1)" ”To“ Janken production (Aiko 3) ”, after changing the symbol to display a plurality of special effect symbols, the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a fluctuating effect in which a “jenken effect” is performed, in which two characters (a friend character and an opponent character) perform a junk.

“Janken production (losing 1)” to “Janken production (losing 6)” are fluctuating productions that are executed when the jackpot determination result is a loss. Further, “Janken production (win 1)” to “Janken production (win 3)” are fluctuating productions executed when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is determined as the determination result of the jackpot determination. “Janken production (Aiko 1)” to “Janken production (Aiko 3)” are fluctuating production executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “third big hit” or “small hit”.
Details of this “Janken effect” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 It shows that the special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the special symbol.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E7H” is “second”. This is called a “special pattern variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  FIG. 13A to FIG. 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As will be described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the passing of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the game ball.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-short gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, either “win” or “lost” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 13C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The common figure variation pattern determination table is composed of a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short-time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal variation pattern is determined by comparing the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal variation variation determination table. The

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the effect control board 102 receives the normal pattern variation pattern designation command, the normal symbol variation display is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol is recognized. it can.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 13D is a diagram illustrating an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 13E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13F is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game involving the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is “big hit game” and “small hit” which are executed when “big hit” is won. It is composed of “small hit game” that is executed when winning. The jackpot game is divided into a “first jackpot game”, a “second jackpot game”, and a “third jackpot game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, jackpot winning probabilities and start port winning easiness are set as game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-short-time gaming state, the time required for the normal symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure change time) is set to 15 seconds, and is activated when “winning” is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operation time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is 1 / It is set to 50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times per win, and a game ball can be won per win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, the jackpot game type (first to third jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state or high probability game state, non-short game state, by winning the jackpot Or a combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (game state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game with the number of rounds of 16R (round) is executed (first jackpot game), and then set to the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is called "first jackpot" By winning, a jackpot game with a round number of 4R (round) ("second jackpot game") is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability game state and a short-time game state is called "second jackpot" A jackpot game in which a jackpot game with a round number of 2R (round) ("third jackpot game") is executed and then set to a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state is referred to as a "third jackpot".

  If the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that this initialization processing has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special prize opening control device 80. Special symbol special electric power control processing (special symbol system processing) for performing the above control (control of special symbol system device). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing.

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose power transmission processing data in the normal-time normal power control processing (ordinary symbol system processing) and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose power transmission processing data. If the processing data = 0, the normal symbol determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is to be executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gates 9 and 10 is performed. Normal symbol memory determination processing is performed, and if the normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, the normal symbol change processing when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating is performed based on the normal symbol determination, If normal power processing data = 2, normal symbol stop processing is performed when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped. If general power normal processing data = 3, the second start port 7 is controlled to open / close (first control). (2) Auxiliary game to be started) Carry out the management.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counters corresponding to the starting port (the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7), the big winning port 8 and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the big prize opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving 80B (start opening / closing solenoid drive data and big prize opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25 Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 20, 21, and 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, and 25, display device output processing for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a are input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process ends. If there is a valid detection signal, the start opening prize counter is updated by adding “1” in step S232, and the first start opening entering the main RAM 101c is updated. The first start port winning flag is turned ON in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S234, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in the main RAM 101c in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter as the first special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs the first preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening entrance ball regulation counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. The second starting entrance ball flag is turned ON in the winning flag storage area. The second starting entrance counting rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting entrance 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter as the second special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  Note that the second special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313).

  In step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second pre-determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S253.

  In step S 253, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the usual figure holding number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. Exit.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which no random number is stored. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process shifts to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reserved storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of entering, or the first special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may let them.

  In Step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the processing is shifted to the customer waiting state setting processing in Step S319-1 to Step S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first start port 6, the first special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. “Big jackpot determination table” or “Second low probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is compared with the “decision table” or the “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot”, “small jackpot”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination process ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning in step S312-3. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”. If it is determined that the “small hit” is determined, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4. If the main CPU 101a does not determine “small hit”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5 (a)). The special symbol to be determined is determined.

  In step 312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit special symbol by comparing the random number for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning a small bonus (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step 312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5B) to determine the special symbol for loss. Perform special symbol determination.

  In step S312-6, a special effect symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designating command is effected. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop” based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5. In other words, the special symbol type is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process of FIG. When determining “special symbol” or the like, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table corresponding to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is collated with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data and store it in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation time”) and A special-figure variation pattern including information related to an effect type or the like of a variation effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of the high probability flag and ON / OFF of the short time flag in the gaming condition determination table of FIG. Gaming state or low-probability gaming state, short-time gaming state or non-short-time gaming state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S313-3, and other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. If it is in the gaming state, the process proceeds to step S13-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol to be started (from 1 to 30 times, from 31 times to 74 times, from 75 times to 84 times). Confirm).

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines that the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation display confirmed in step S313-4.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is “lost”, the main CPU 101a further displays the special symbol related to the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), and the special chart of “no reach loss”. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a performs special figure variation pattern determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number, and acquires the acquired special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the special CPU variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, a special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special graphic variation pattern is transmitted for production in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming condition at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting port winning flag or the second starting port winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Move processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the hourly flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, when it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, and when it is not determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), the remaining variation count counter for the high-probability gaming state, and the remaining variation count counter for the time-short gaming state. To do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. The main CPU 101a sets the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the big prize opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 ( The operating time of the big prize opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all preset round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-7, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and moves the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hit game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, in order to open the special winning opening 8, the energization start data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special operation is performed with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means the period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, nine), or the opening time of one time of the big winning opening 8 has passed (special game timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the large winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to. Based on the current special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special winning action number (K) is set to the number of times the special winning opening 8 is set in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special operation number storage area and sets “0” to the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending time according to the type of small hits. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special electricity processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag (01H) is set in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition state, sets a game state designation command indicating the current game condition state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-7 0 is set in the figure special electricity processing data, and the process proceeds to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S <b> 1002, the sub CPU 102 a performs a process of updating the effect random number used for controlling the effect including the random effect determination random number, the variable effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process. Details of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
A command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, it moves the process to step S1303. If it determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a pre-process for executing the demonstration effect, and waits for the demonstration effect to start (demo effect standby). Time) is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs start opening prize designation command storage processing. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in an effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the starting opening prize designation command storage process.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the start opening winning designation command, and the type of the starting opening. Is stored in the production information storage area corresponding to

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of the start ports 6 and 7. The start opening winning designation command is sequentially stored from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

  Each storage unit stores a start opening prize designation command section that stores a starting opening prize designation command, and effect data for effects performed based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the starting opening prize designation command section. And an effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures the special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol stop display is being performed, and for performing the special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. In the special effect design pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect design designation command and displays the special effect in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the information included in the received special effect design designation command. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display of symbols, that is, special effect symbols is determined.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1311. If it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and the variable effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (the special effect symbol variation display). The variable effect pattern determination process for determining the variable effect pattern is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1313 and step S1314. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Move processing.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Upon receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect ends, and terminate the variation effect and display the special effect symbol stop display. . Note that the end time of the production is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event on the production during the variation production.

  In S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the data for presentation stored in the sub RAM 102c described later.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a performs an effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode in response to the end of the special symbol variation display, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variable display). It is related to the state of the game condition and the like.
Describe.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1318. If it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1320. If it determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  Here, the variation effect pattern determination table used in the later-described variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 35) will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a enters the special mode variation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current gaming state. A process for determining a variation effect pattern is performed from the associated variation effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A stored in the sub ROM 102b and set in a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, which will be described later.
FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with effect mode B that is set in a special probability variation number of 1 to 30 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode C that is set in a special probability variation number of 31 to 74 times in a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 43 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode D that is set in the special probability variation number 75 to 84 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state described later. Show.

  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 include special symbol determination results (decision results of jackpot determination), special diagram variation pattern designation commands from the main control board 101, and variations corresponding to the special diagram variation time. Based on the production time (s) of the production, the fluctuation production pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the fluctuation production pattern, the fluctuation production pattern determined according to the fluctuation production pattern judgment value, and the fluctuation production pattern The contents of the fluctuation effects and the presence / absence of execution (execution (◯), non-execution (×)) of each special effect in the fluctuation effects based on the fluctuation effect pattern are stored in association with each other.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
In the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-temporary gaming state in FIG. 40, the player has a sense of expectation such as whether to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. As a variation production pattern with different expectations for winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot, a variation production pattern that executes super reach after execution of normal reach, and a variation production pattern that executes special reach after execution of normal reach And a variable effect of executing super reach after executing normal reach and then executing special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not to win the third big hit or the small win, a variation production pattern in which a story reach is executed after execution of a normal reach, and a variation production pattern in which a challenge reach is executed after execution of a normal reach And have.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A in FIG. 40, when the special symbol determination result is lost, “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command. One of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-”). 3 ”), a fluctuating effect for informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A004” to “variation presentation pattern A006” is determined. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol variation A2-1” to “symbol variation A2-3”). "), A fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A007” to “variation presentation pattern A009”. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A007” to “variation effect pattern A009” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol variation A3-1” to “symbol variation A3-3”). ), A fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H03H” or “E7H03H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A010” to “variation presentation pattern A012” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A010” to “variation effect pattern A012” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost Production.

  When “E6H07H” or “E7H07H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A022” to “variation presentation pattern A025” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A022” to “variation effect pattern A025” display a variety of special effect symbols (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( ("Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H08H” or “E7H08H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A026” to “variation presentation pattern A029” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A026” to “variation effect pattern A029” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H09H” or “E7H09H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A030” to “variation presentation pattern A033” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A030” to “variation effect pattern A033” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, the variation variation pattern A034 to the variation variation pattern A037 are selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A038” to “variation presentation pattern A041” Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A042” to “variation effect pattern A045” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") Is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H10H” or “E7H10H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern A058 to the variation variation pattern A060 is selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A058” to “variation effect pattern A060” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Characters that appear in the challenge reach as described above after performing normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left and right symbols) with the same numerical value. Going on a journey to find a domestic dog that disappeared, and finally finding a domestic dog, a story reach consisting of a story that suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("story reach A1-1" ”To“ Story Reach A1-3 ”), and it is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot .

  As described above, the variation effects of “variation effect pattern A061” to “variation effect pattern A063” are the purpose of the character from among a plurality of treasure chests after the symbol change including two pseudo-reams (“pseudo-ream 2”). Challenge treasure hunting game of searching for the sword of the item, and the fact that the character wins the item suggests that the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("challenge reach A1- 1 ”to“ Challenge Reach A1-3 ”), and is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A064” to “variation effect pattern A066” is a character cloak of a target item from a plurality of treasure chests after a pattern change including three pseudo-reams (“pseudo-ream 3”). A challenge reach (“challenge reach A2-1” to “challenge reach A2”) that challenges the treasure hunt game and suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item acquired by the character. 3 ”) and is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A072” include “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A”, “decision” as special effects. Information indicating execution (◯) and non-execution (×) of “effect A” is associated.

  Here, as will be described later, the “line notice” is a jackpot game by displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image in which a character described later speaks one of a plurality of lines having different expectations for the jackpot. Is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” of “Selif Notice A” is executed as “Selif Notice”.

  In addition, the “character notice”, as will be described later, notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying any image of a plurality of characters having different expectations for the jackpot on the image display device 14. This is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” of “character notice A” is executed as “character notice”.

  Further, as described later, the “development notice” refers to the state of the first effect button 18A (non-projecting state or protruding state) or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A. In addition to notifying the possibility of developing from the current performance to a higher next performance with a high expectation for the jackpot, the possibility of executing the jackpot game is notified, and the expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot It is a notice effect to give. In the production mode A, as will be described later, “Development Notice A1” or “Development Notice A2” of “Development Notice A” is executed as “Development Notice”.

  In addition, the “decision effect” is an effect for notifying the determination of a big hit, as will be described later. When the first big hit or the second big win is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of losing, the first decoration member 17A is not operated. In effect mode A, as will be described later, “determined effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “determined effect A” is executed as “determined effect”.

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “variation effect pattern A034”, “Selif notice A”, “Character notice A”, “Development notice A” are executed (O), “Decisive effect A” ”Is associated with non-execution (×).
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “subject notice A” and “character notice A” as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that “Development notice A” is executed.

The variable effect performed in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, which is more likely to win the jackpot than the low-probability game state and the non-short-time game state, is a simple effect that does not overwhelm the notice effect.
In addition, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, a maximum of 84 variation effects are performed in a special mode variation number 1 to 30 times and a special diagram variation number 31 times so as not to be redundant. Different effects are performed in the effect mode C performed at 74 times and the effect mode D performed at 75 to 84 special figure fluctuations.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 41 is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state described above. This is a variation effect pattern of a variation effect that is executed once to 30 times.

  In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a sense of expectation that it will be easy to win a jackpot. Therefore, in the production mode B, in order to give the player a sense of expectation that a big win will be won in a short period with a small number of special figure fluctuations, The production of the fluctuation is simpler than the production.

  In the effect mode B, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure fluctuation time is longer than that in the effect mode A so that the fluctuation effect of the next special figure fluctuation frequency is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a variation effect pattern of 2 seconds and a variation effect at a high rate. In addition, when the special effect design is changed to reach, only the “special character reach” is executed so that characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 41, when “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. The “variation effect pattern B001” or “variation effect pattern B002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern B001” and “variation effect pattern B002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation B1-1”, “symbol variation B1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variable rendering pattern B003” or “variable rendering pattern B004” is determined. The When “E6H32H” or “E7H32H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is “lost”, “variable rendering pattern B005” or “variable rendering pattern B006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B003” to “variation effect pattern B006” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”, “symbol variation B3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation B3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H33H” or “E7H33H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern B007” or “variation effect pattern B008” is determined.

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H34H” or “E7H34H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B009” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B010” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H35H” or “ When "E7H35H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern B011" or "Variation effect pattern B012" is selected. When the special figure change pattern designation command "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern" When “B013” or “Variation effect pattern B014” is determined and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H37H” or “E7H37H” is determined, “Variation effect pattern B015” or “Variation effect pattern B016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern designation command “E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B007” to “variation effect pattern B018” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”, “symbol variation B2-1”). ”,“ Symbol Variation B2-2 ”), and then a special character reach in which a special character appears (“ Special Character Reach B4-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B4-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-2, Special Character Reach B6-1, Special Character Reach B6-2, Special Character Reach B1-1, Special Character Reach B1-2, Special Character Reach B2- 1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B2-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B3-1 ”, and“ Special Character Reach B3-2 ”), and a variable performance that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost It is.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B019” or “variation effect pattern B020” is determined. The

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern B023 "or" variation effect pattern B024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B019” to “variation effect pattern B024” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”). Special character reach ("Special Character Reach B1-1", "Special Character Reach B1-2", "Special Character Reach B2-1", "Special Character Reach B2-2", "Special Character Reach B3-1" , “Special Character Reach B3-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot and “E6H3FH” or “E7H3FH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B031” or “variation effect pattern B032” is determined. The

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H40H” or “E7H40H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B033” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B034” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H41H” or “E7H41H”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern B035 "or" variation effect pattern B036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B031” to “variation effect pattern B036” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”). Special Character Reach ("Special Character Reach B4-1", "Special Character Reach B4-2", "Special Character Reach B5-1", "Special Character Reach B5-2", "Special Character Reach B6-1" , “Special Character Reach B6-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, the “variation effect pattern B001” to the “variation effect pattern B042” are executed as a special effect of “development notice B” and “decision effect B” (◯), not executed ( X) is associated with the information.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern B019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice B” is executed (◯) and “decision effect B” is not executed (×).
If the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern B019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, it confirms that “development notice B” is executed as a special effect in step S1311-6. To do.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42 is a variation effect of the variation effect that is performed after 31 to 74 times of special figure variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode C, there is a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change frequency 1 to 30 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the production mode C as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “special character reach” of the production mode B in the special figure variation times 31 to 74 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Has a variation production pattern of “attack reach” in which an attack is made.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42, when the special symbol determination result is lost, “E6H50H” or “E7H50H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command. The “variable effect pattern C001” or “variable effect pattern C002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C001” and “variation effect pattern C002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation C1-1”, “symbol variation C1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H51H” or “E7H51H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C003” or “variable rendering pattern C004” is determined. The When “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C005” or “variable rendering pattern C006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern C003” to “variation effect pattern C006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If “E6H53H” or “E7H53H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern C007” or “variation effect pattern C008” is determined.

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H54H” or “E7H54H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern C009” or “fluctuation presentation pattern C010” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H55H” or “ When "E7H55H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern C011" or "Variation effect pattern C012" is selected. When the special figure change pattern designation command "E6H56H" or "E7H56H" is determined, When the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H57H” or “E7H57H” is determined for “C013” or “variable effect pattern C014”, “variable effect pattern C015” or “variable effect pattern C016” Pattern designation command “E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C007” to “variation effect pattern C018” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), and then an attack reach (“ attack reach C4-1 ”,“ attack reach C4-2 ”,“ attack reach C5-1 ”), where a predetermined character attacks. “Attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “attack reach C6-2”, “attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack Reach C2-2 ”,“ Attack reach C3-1 ”, and“ Attack reach C3-2 ”), and a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C019” or “variation effect pattern C020” is determined. The

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern C021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern C022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern C023 "or" variation effect pattern C024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” to “variation effect pattern C024” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C3-1”, “symbol variation C3-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack reach C2-2”, “attack reach C3-1”, "Attack reach C3-2"), and it is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H5FH” or “E7H5FH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, “variable rendering pattern C031” or “variable rendering pattern C032” is determined. The

  Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H60H” or “E7H60H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern C033” or “fluctuation presentation pattern C034” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H61H” or “E7H61H”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern C035 "or" variation effect pattern C036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C031” to “variation effect pattern C036” displays a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C4-1”, “attack C4-2”, “attack reach C5-1”, “attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “ The attack effect C6-2 ") is performed to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, a variation effect similar to the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, the “variation effect pattern C001” to the “variation effect pattern C042” are executed (O) or non-executed as special effects as “advance notice C” and “decision effect C”. Information indicating (x) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern C019” is associated with information indicating the execution (◯) of “development notice C” and “determination effect C”.
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern C019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice C” and “determination effect C” are provided as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43 is the variation effect of the variation effect that is performed after 75 to 84 times of the special figure variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode D, there is a change effect pattern of a change effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change times 31 to 74 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, it appears only in the production mode D as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “attack reach” of the production mode C in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state in the special figure fluctuation frequency 31 to 74 times. The character that performs the janken has a variation effect pattern of “Janken production” with the content of performing the janken a predetermined number of times with the character that is the opponent of the janken. With such a variation effect of the janken effect, the player can be expected to win a big hit with the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state with a small remaining number of times.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43, when “E6H70H” or “E7H70H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. If any of “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D003” is determined, and “E6H71H” or “E7H71H” is determined, “variation effect pattern D004” to “variation effect pattern D003”. If any one of “pattern D006” is determined and “E6H72H” or “E7H72H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D007” to “variable effect pattern D009” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D009” are “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”, “symbol” which displays a plurality of special effect symbols. ”Difference D2-1” to “Symbol Variation D2-3” and “Symbol Variation D3-1” to “Symbol Variation D3-3”) This is a fluctuating effect in which an effect (contention character, opponent character) performs a single janken, an effect that the teammate character loses, and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When “E6H73H” or “E7H73H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any one of “variable rendering pattern D010” to “variable rendering pattern D012” is determined. Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D013” to “variable effect pattern D015” is determined, and the special figure variation is determined. When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D018” is a variation effect in which “Janken Reach” is executed after “symbol variation” and the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D012” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( Fluctuation that performs the effect that the character of the ally loses in the second round of the "Janken Reach D1-1" to "Janken Reach D1-3"), and informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D013” to “variation effect pattern D015” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D2-1" to "Janken Reach D2-3") The effect is that the ally character wins at the second round of janken and the ally character loses at the third round of kenken, and the jackpot determination This is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result is lost.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second and third rounds of janken win the teammate character, and the fourth round of kenken wins the teammate character. This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D019” to “variation effect pattern D021” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( Fluctuation to notify that the result of the jackpot determination is a big hit by performing the effect that the ally character wins even in the second round of the "Janken Reach D1-1" to "Janken Reach D1-3") Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D022” to “variation effect pattern D024” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D2-1" to "Janken Reach D2-3") In the second and third rounds of janken, the team will produce the content that the teammate wins continuously, and the jackpot determination result is a big hit This is a fluctuating effect to notify that there is.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D025” to “variation effect pattern D027” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) will play the first round of the janken, and the ally's character will win, and then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second round to the fourth round of Janken will produce the content that the ally character wins continuously, and the jackpot determination result is a big hit It is a fluctuating effect that informs that it is.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H7CH” or “E7H7CH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern D037 to the variation variation pattern D039 is selected. When any one of them is determined and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H7DH” or “E7H7DH” is decided, any one of “fluctuation effect pattern D040” to “fluctuation effect pattern D042” is determined and When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D037” to “variation effect pattern D039” are “pattern variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to “Janken Reach D1-3”) This is a fluctuating effect informing that the result is a third big hit or a small hit.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D040” to “variation effect pattern D042” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D2-1" to "Janken Reach D2-3") The ally character wins in the second round of janken, and the ally character and the opponent's character in the third round of kenken are "Aiko" This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content is performed and the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot is informed.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second and third rounds of janken win the teammates in succession. This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content that becomes “Aiko” is performed and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

“Variation effect pattern D001” to “Variation effect pattern D054” are associated with information on execution (O) of “development notice D”, “character notice D”, and “decision effect D” as special effects. Yes.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern D019” is associated with information indicating execution of “development notice D” (◯) and execution of “decision effect D” (◯).
If the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern D019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice D” and “character notice D” as special effects in step S1311-6. Then, it is confirmed that “decision effect D” is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 43, in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B is executed in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 30 times. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the effect mode C in the effect mode C that is executed with the number of changes of 31 to 74 times than the change effect, and the number of changes is 35 to 84 than the change effect in the effect mode C. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the change effect of the effect mode D executed in a single time.

(Type of each special production)
44 and 45 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode A”. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 44 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the execution ratio (%) of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” as “Serial notice A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is set, the execution ratio (%) of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6” as “Development notice A” is set, and “ The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” as “decided effect A” is set.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect in effect mode A. FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” for storing the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45C shows a “development advance notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development advance notice A” in the production mode A. FIG. 45 (d) is a diagram showing a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in effect mode A.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 45 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

“Serif notice A1” is a display of an effect image of “Serif a1” “Ippin Senkinja!” On the image display device 14. In the “serif notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₁₁ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the first presentation button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, “Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Short Money” !! The content effect image (see (a-1-3) in FIG. 53) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” to the “operation position 3” as a movable member. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  “Serif notice A2” is the same as “Serif notice A1” except that the effect image of “Serif a2”, “Are you getting one hundred?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated. is there.

  “Selif notice A3” is the same as “Serif notice A1” except that the effect image of “Serif a3”, “Is it possible to acquire both?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated. is there.

  “Selif notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, but displays an effect image of “Serif a4” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as “Serif notice A1”.

  “Selif notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, but displays an effect image of “Serif a5” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as “Serif notice A1”.

  44 (a) and 44 (b), in “Serif Notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” is highest in “Serif Notice A1”. The execution rate of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” is set in “Selif Notice A” so as to become lower as it becomes “Selif Notice A2” to “Self Notice A5”.

“Character notice A1” is to display the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y ₁₁ described later), the operation promotion is performed. The notification is not executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, an effect image of “character a2-1” to be described later (see (a-2-3) in FIG. 53) based on one pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  “Character notice A2” is displayed in the same way as “Character a2-1”, except that the effect image “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-3) in FIG. 54) is displayed on the image display device 14. The content of the performance is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A3” is displayed in a manner other than “Character a2-3” (see (c-2-3) in FIG. 55) on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The content of the performance is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, and instead of “Character a2-1”, an effect image of “Character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, and an effect image of “Character notice a2-5” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1” at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), “Character notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” in “Character notice A1”. The execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set so as to decrease as “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”.

“Development notice A1” is to display the effect image of “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as the operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₁₂ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, an effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 53) is displayed as an image based on a single pressing operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. While displaying on the device 14, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17 </ b> B as the movable member from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  “Development notice A2” is the same as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”.

  “Development notice A3” is produced as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  “Development notice A4” is the same as “Development notice A1” except that the first effect button 18A is set in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.

  “Development notice A5” displays the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, with the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period. Except that the movable member is not operated, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice A1”.

  “Development notice A6” causes the first effect button 18A to be in a non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”. Except that the movable member is not operated, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice A1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the “development notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpots of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “development notice A1”. The execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set so as to become lower as it becomes “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.
Also, in the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in the variable effect that develops from “super reach” to “special reach”, the first effect button 18A is projected at a high rate during the operation effective period. In the variable production that does not develop from “Super Reach” to “Special Reach”, the execution of “Development Notice A1” to “Development Notice A6” is performed so that the first effect button 18A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation effective period. A percentage is set.

“Decision effect A1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of “flash” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 54). ). In the “decided effect A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₂₂ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed once in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is displayed. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In “decision effect A2”, the operation effective period is not set, and the effect image of “flash a2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the “standby position 1” as a movable member. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in “decided effect A”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” is “decided” than “decided effect A2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” is set so that “effect A1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect A1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

46 and 47 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 46B shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the execution ratio (%) of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” as “Development Notice B” is set, and “Decision Effect B” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect B1” and “decided effect B2” is set.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. FIG. 47A shows a “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the production mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a “determined effect B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 41, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 47 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

“Development notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₄₁ described later) for enabling the operation on the first effect button 18A is set, and the operation of the first effect button 18A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, an effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 58) is displayed as an image based on a single pressing operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

  The “development notice B2” sets the state of the first effect button 18A to the non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect b2” (not shown) instead of “effect b1” on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice B1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in “Development Notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” is “Development Notice B1”. The execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set to be higher than “B2”.
Also, in the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in the variation effect that develops from “symbol variation” to “special character reach”, the first effect button 18A is projected at a high rate during the operation effective period. In a variation production that does not develop from “symbol variation” to “special character reach”, “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” so that the first production button 18A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation effective period. Execution rate is set.

“Decision effect B1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 59). ). In the “determination effect B1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₅₂ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the pressing operation is performed once for the operation on the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member is displayed. A corresponding effect such as moving 17A from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect B2,” the operation effective period is not set, and the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the “standby position 1” as a movable member. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in “decision effect B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is “determined” than “decision effect B2”. The execution ratio of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is set so that “effect B1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect B1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

48 and 49 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode C”. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, execution ratios (%) of “Development notice C1” and “Development notice C2” as “Development notice C” are set, and “Decision effect C” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect C1” and “decided effect C2” is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the changing effect of the effect mode C. 49A shows a “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the production mode C. FIG. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 49 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

“Development notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 62) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice C1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X _71, which will be described later) for enabling the operation on the first effect button 18A is set, and the operation of the first effect button 18A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect c1” on the image display device 14 based on one press operation on the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period is executed. To do.

  The “development notice C2” sets the state of the first effect button 18A to the non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect c2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect c1”. Except for the display, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice C1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “Development Notice C”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice C1” and “Development Notice C2” is “Development Notice C1”. The execution ratio of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is set to be higher than “C2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in the variation effect that develops from “symbol variation” to “attack reach”, the first effect button 18A protrudes at a high rate during the operation effective period. In the variable production that does not develop from “symbol fluctuation” to “attack reach”, the “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are executed so that the first production button 18A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation effective period. A percentage is set.

“Decision effect C1” moves the first decorative member 17A of the movable member and displays an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see FIG. 62 (g-3-3)). In this “decision effect C1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation becomes effective during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₇₂ described later) is set. In the operation effective period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect C2”, the operation effective period is not set, and the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the “standby position 1” as a movable member. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “decision effect C”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” is “determined” than “decision effect C2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect C1” and “decided effect C2” is set so that “effect C1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect C1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

50 and 51 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode D”. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 50 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, the execution ratio (%) of “Development Prediction D1” and “Development Notice D2” as “Development Notice D” is set, and “Decision Effect D” The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. FIG. 51A is a diagram showing an “development notice D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice D” in the rendering mode D. FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” in effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 51 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

The “development notice D1” displays an effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 65) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice D1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₁₀₁ described later) for enabling an operation on the first effect button 18A is set, and the operation of the first effect button 18A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed. To do.

  The “development notice D2” sets the state of the first effect button 18A to the non-projecting state during the operation valid period, and displays an effect image of “effect d2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect d1”. Except for the display, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice D1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of the “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is “development notice D1”. The execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set to be higher than “D2”.
Further, in the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in the variation effect that develops from “symbol variation” to “Janken Reach”, the first effect button 18A is projected at a high rate during the operation effective period. In the variation production that does not develop from “symbol variation” to “Janken Reach”, the “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” are executed so that the first production button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation effective period. A percentage is set.

“Character notice D1” is to display the effect image of “Character d1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice D1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, operation effective period Y ₁₀₁ described later), the operation promotion is performed. The notification is not executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, an effect image of “character d1” described later (see (j-4-2) in FIG. 65) is generated based on one pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice D2” is the same as “Character notice D1” except that an effect image of “Character d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”.

  “Character notice D3” is the same as “Character notice D1” except that an effect image of “Character d3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in “Development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3” is the highest in “Character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

“Decision effect D1” moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and displays the effect image of “flash d1” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-4) in FIG. 65). ). In the “determination effect D1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₁₀₂ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is displayed. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect D2” displays an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting an operation effective period, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in “decided effect D”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is “decided” than “decided effect D2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set so that “effect D1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect D1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in the “decided effect D”, the “decided effect D1” and the “decided effect D1” are executed so that the “decided effect D1” is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect D2”. The execution ratio of “D2” is set.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect) during the operation effective period in which the operation on the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) is validated as a special effect in the figure variation effect. The corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the button 19A).

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher period (first period) in the specific gaming state at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the period of (1), an operation effective period is set during the variation effect.

  That is, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the changing 31st to 74th times) in the effect mode C than in the changing effect (the changing times 1 to 30). In addition, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the 75th to 84th changes) in the effect mode D than the changing effect in the effect mode C.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a later period (in the specific gaming state) at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the first period), an operation effective period in which the first effect button 18A as the operation means for enabling the operation is set to the projecting state which is the second state is set.

(Variation effect pattern determination processing by effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, thereby setting the current mode set in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described later. The production mode is confirmed, and the variation production pattern determination table associated with the current production mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode A”. Then, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode B”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B shown in FIG. 41 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode C”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C shown in FIG. 42 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode D”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG. 43 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode E”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown) is selected.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, in each effect mode, one or more variable effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special figure change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern is identification information representing the effect contents of the variation effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variation effect.

  The variation effect pattern is associated with the elements of the variation effect, such as the time of the change effect, the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the contents of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In addition, in the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14, the display mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also components of the variation effect. It is associated.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random effect pattern determination random number. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect storage pattern random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a collates the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area in step S1313-4 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby changing the variation effect pattern. The process of determining is performed.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a performs execution (O) and non-execution (x) information (FIG. 40 to FIG. 40) associated with the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-4. By checking (see FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect in the determined variation effect of the variation effect pattern. If the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-6. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-9.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, if the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the sub CPU 102a executes “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” as special effects in step S1311-6. Then, it is confirmed that the “decision effect A” is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process proceeds to step S1311-9. If it is determined that the process has not ended, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A in FIG. “Selif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” is determined as the type of “Serial Notice A1”, and “Character Notice A1” to “Character Notice A5” is determined as the “Character Notice A” type. Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a includes the special effect information of the type determined in step S1311-7 in the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, and the variable effect control thereof. The command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a stores the variable effect data corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variable effect in the variable effect timer counter. . The variation effect timer counter is incremented by “4” in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variation effect at the present time by the variation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the change effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the change effect effect image based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command, and the sound output device outputs the change effect sound. The control which outputs from 15 is performed. In addition, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102. Control and control for outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs the operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and the illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting process by production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. . If the sub CPU 102a confirms that it is a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-3, and if it confirms that it is not a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-7.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information included in the special effect symbol designation command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b, and compares the confirmed result of the special symbol determination with the effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, “effect mode B” is determined as shown in FIG. Thereby, after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game, the “effect mode B” is set.
Further, when the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 39, the “effect mode E” is determined. Thereby, after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, the “effect mode E” is set.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode that is associated with the effect mode. (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The number of performance mode executions is the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects (M: remaining number of effect modes) that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When “effect mode B” is determined in step S1314-7, “effect mode B” is set after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game. 30 times are stored as Ma).
In addition, when the “effect mode E” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, and the number of executions of the effect mode is possible. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current mode is the production mode A, that is, whether or not the production mode flag “00H” is set in the production mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization process of step S10 in the main process of the main control board described above, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode flag “00H” in the effect mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  In step S1314-3, when determining that the sub CPU 102a is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, when determining that the mode is not the production mode A, the sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number (M) of the production mode by subtracting “1” from the counter value of the production mode remaining number counter in step S1314-4. In −5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

  In step S1314-5, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the remaining number (M) of the effect mode is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. If it is determined that there is “0”, an effect mode flag of “transfer destination effect mode” shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of the transfer destination effect mode) in step S1314-6, and the effect mode setting process is performed. Exit.

  For example, the sub CPU 102a sets the production mode to the production mode B in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game, and M = 0 in step S1314-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S 1314-5), in step S 1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode after the effect mode B (transition destination effect mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode C set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode C is determined in step S1314-6. The production mode D is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode D set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode D is determined in step S1314-6. Production mode A is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 39, effect mode A is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
Also, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot, if the number of special figure changes is 1 to 30 The production mode B is set, the production mode C is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 31 to 74 times, and the production mode D is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 75 to 84 times.
Also, if the number of special figure fluctuations after the third big hit game or after the small hit game when winning the third big hit or the small hit game is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode set as described above.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“Selif notice”, “Character notice”, “Development notice”, “Decisive effect”) among the change effect patterns shown in the change effect pattern determination tables of FIGS. The variation effect pattern associated with the information (◯) is determined, and the operation effective period shown in FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, and FIG. 51 as the type of the special effect associated with the determined variation effect pattern. When the type of the special effect associated with is determined, the operation valid period is set in the variable effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects (the ratio of ◯) in FIGS. 40 to 43 and FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a has the “effect mode in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. “A” is executed in “effect mode B” to “effect mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state at a rate higher than the rate of determining the special effect type associated with the operation effective period to be executed in “A”. The type of special effect associated with the operation valid period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than the ratio of the operation effective period in the variation effect of the “effect mode A” in the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, and the “effect mode in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state. In the variation effect of “B” to “effect mode D”, the operation valid period is set.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects (circle ratio) in FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102 a performs the second big hit game after the end of the first big hit game. Among “Production Mode B” to “Production Mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the end of “Production Mode B”, “Production Mode C” As the “effect mode D”, the special effect type associated with the operation effective period is determined as a special effect type to be executed in that mode at a higher rate. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuating effect. Here, among “production mode B” to “production mode D”, the special production executed in that mode at a higher rate as “production mode B”, “production mode C”, and “production mode D”. As the type, the type of special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), an operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) during the fluctuating effect is set.

(Production input control processing by production control board)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a detects the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 based on the pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and the second effect button operation based on the operation of the second effect button 19A. By determining whether or not any of the second effect button operation detection signals from the detection switch 19a is input, it is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated.

  In this step S1401, if the sub CPU 102a determines that any of the operating means has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if it is determined that no operating means has been operated, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is currently being performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1403 to change the special symbol variation. If it is determined that the image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation effect pattern of the variation effect being executed according to the current special symbol variation display stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the variation effect by the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403. If it is determined that it is during the operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S1405. If it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a performs a single stroke (one-time operation) that is a designation operation for the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means that is enabled during the operation effective period determined in step S1404. It is determined whether or not a pressing operation has been performed based on whether or not a first effect button operation detection signal is input from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11.
In this step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 during the operation effective period, thereby specifying operation to the operation means whose operation is enabled. If it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1406, and the operation that has been enabled during the operation effective period is not performed because the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 is not input. When it is determined that no designation operation has been performed on the means, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets the corresponding effect control command for controlling the corresponding effect based on the designated operation to the operation means for which the operation is enabled in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a confirms “variation effect pattern A034” as the variation effect pattern in step S1403 and executes “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a sends a corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and Transmit to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display the effect image of “serif a1” as the corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” to “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation to move to “position 3” is performed.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102a promotes an operation that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A in a game effect related to a game using a game ball, such as a change effect that is performed during a special symbol change display. In the operation effective period during which the notification is performed, the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game effect relating to the game is in a game standby state, and if it is determined that the game is in a standby state, the process proceeds to step S1408, and the game When it is determined that it is not waiting, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation means is valid during the game standby, and determines that it is during the operation effective period. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1409, and when it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 102a performs a single operation (1 in the operation effective period) that is a specified operation to the first effect button 18A that is the operation means in which the operation is enabled during the operation effective period determined in step S1408. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed once.
In this step S1409, when the sub CPU 102a determines that a single stroke, which is a designated operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means for which the operation is enabled, has been made during the operation effective period determined in step S1408. In step S1410, the process proceeds to step S1410. If it is determined that the first effect button 18A is not single-shot, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display a menu screen that allows the player to select and determine various menus that can be set in the gaming machine based on the designation operation determined in step S1409. The menu screen control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The menu screen control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500.
Then, upon receiving the menu screen control command, the image control board 105 performs control to display the menu screen based on the control content indicated by the menu screen control command.

  Further, the menu screen control command may be transmitted to the lamp control board 104 by the data output process in step S1500. In this case, when receiving the menu screen control command, the lamp control board 104 lights the first effect button 18A that becomes effective when the menu screen is displayed based on the control content indicated by the menu screen control command. Therefore, LED light emission control is performed.

  In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a turns on the designated operation execution flag indicating that the designated operation is performed in step S1409 in the designated operation execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid state that validates the operation on the second effect button 19A as the second operation means when the designated execution flag is set to ON.

In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the designated operation execution flag in the designated operation execution flag storage area to ON when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 14, and the menu screen is not displayed on the image display device 14. And set it off.
As described above, the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the designated operation execution flag is set to ON when the first effect button 19A is pressed once during the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. Then, an operation valid state for validating the operation on the second effect button 19A is set.

  In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A during execution of a game effect related to a game using a game ball, such as a change effect that is performed during a special symbol change display. In the operation effective state in which the first effect button 18A is operated, the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

  On the other hand, in the operation effective state during the standby state in which no game effect is being executed, the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state (first state) while being set to the protruding state (second state). Is limiting.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen displayed on the image display device 14 based on the control based on the menu screen control command set in step S1409.

  The menu screen shown in FIG. 38 is referred to as “volume setting” as a character image 510 indicating “select a menu” and a character image indicating a menu selectable by the upper portion 191A and the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A. A character image 511 indicating a menu, a character image 512 indicating a menu “light quantity setting”, a character image 513 indicating a menu “guide”, a character image 514 indicating a menu “return”, and selection of these menus. An image 515A of the second effect button 19A used, a character image 515B of “select”, an image 516A of the first effect button 18A used when determining the selected menu, and a character image 516B of “decide” Have.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a character image 511 indicating a menu item “volume setting”, a character image 512 indicating a menu item “light intensity setting”, a character image 513 indicating a menu item “guide”, and a menu “return” Character images 514 indicating items are arranged and displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the menu screen in this order.

  As described above, the menu screen in FIG. 38 is displayed on the image display device 14 by pressing the first effect button 18A. When this menu screen is displayed, the operation on the second effect button 19A is valid. . Each time a press operation is performed on the upper portion 191A of the second effect button 19A, the menu item displayed on the upper side of the menu screen is selected, and a press operation is performed on the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A. Each time the menu item is displayed, the menu item displayed on the lower side of the menu screen is selected.

  The menu screen shown in FIG. 38 is in a state where the “volume setting” menu item is selected, and the menu item selected in this way is selected to be distinguishable from other menu items. A character image indicating a menu item is flashed or an effect image is added to enhance the character.

  Then, the selected menu item is determined by one pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and then an image of the content of the determined menu item is displayed.

When “volume setting” is determined as a menu item, a volume setting screen (not shown) on which a volume gauge for the player to adjust the volume output from the gaming machine Y is displayed.
When “light quantity setting” is determined as the menu item, a light quantity setting screen (not shown) on which a volume gauge for the player to adjust the light quantity of the LED in the effect lighting device 16 is displayed. .
When “Guide” is determined as the menu item, explanation of reach production executed in the fluctuation effects of the production modes A to D, explanation of characters appearing in the fluctuation production of the production modes A to D, production modes A to D Various guide screens (not shown) such as explanation of reliability for jackpots in “Selif notice” and “Character notice” executed in the variation effect of D are displayed.
When “return” is determined as the menu item, the screen of the image display device 14 returns to the screen before displaying the menu screen.

  In addition, a state in which the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14 by determining “volume setting” as the menu item, and a light amount setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14 by determining “light amount setting”. In the displayed state, the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A can be pressed.

  When the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14, the volume can be adjusted by pressing the left part 192A and the right part 194A of the second effect button 19A. Each time the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the volume decreases, and the level of the volume gauge decreases accordingly. Further, every time the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the volume increases, and the level of the volume gauge increases accordingly.

  When the light amount setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14, the light amount can be adjusted by pressing the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. Each time the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A is pressed down, the light amount of the LED in the effect lighting device 16 decreases, and the level of the light amount gauge also decreases accordingly. Further, every time the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the light amount of the LED in the effect lighting device 16 increases, and accordingly, the level of the light amount gauge also increases.

  Note that the operation means (second operation means) that becomes effective when the first effect button 18A is pressed once during the standby state is not limited to the second effect button 19A described above. Other operation means may be applied.

  For example, when the gaming machine Y is provided with an operation lever (not shown) that can be tilted toward the front side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, the operation lever is applied instead of the second effect button 19A. . Specifically, for example, the tilting operation to the back side of the operation lever corresponds to the pressing operation of the upper portion 191A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation to the near side of the operation lever is the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A. The tilting operation to the left side of the operation lever corresponds to the pressing operation of the left part 192A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation to the right side of the operation lever 19A is the right part 194A of the second effect button 19A. This corresponds to the pressing operation. The upper portion 191A, the left portion 192A, the lower portion 193A, and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A do not have to correspond to the back side, the left side, the near side, and the right side of the operation lever in this way. For example, the tilting operation to the back side of the operation lever corresponds to the pressing operation of the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation to the near side of the operation lever is the pressing operation of the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A. You may make it correspond to.

  Further, the menu screen displayed on the image display device 14 is not limited to the example of FIG. 38 described above. For example, a “character selection” for causing the player to select a character to appear during the production from a plurality of characters. It may be a menu screen having menu items such as “song selection” for allowing the player to select a song to be output during the jackpot game from a plurality of songs.

Here, a specific example of the variation effect will be described.
(Specific example of variation production in production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows the temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A034”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 52 (b) shows the time variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A038”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 52 (c) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A042”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern A034 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state and “variable effect pattern A034” is selected, the sub CPU 102a performs timing T ₁₁ shown in FIG. 52 (a). the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₁₄ from performing. FIG. 53 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 52A, the first effect button 18A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2), "normal reach perform A1-1 ", then, in the period from the timing _{T 13} to time _{T 14} (a-3) and the period (a-4), conducts effect control for executing the" super reach A1-1 " .

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes the special effect symbols in FIG. 53 and the predetermined character “character a1 (kunoichi)” appears in FIG. Effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-1-1) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”. “Selif notice A” is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a displays “Selif Notice A” in FIG. 45A according to the execution rate of “Selif Notice A” in “Variation Effect Pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. Effect control for executing any one of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “symbol variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the first effect button 18A is displayed. setting the operating lifetime _{X 11} to enable the operation (see FIG. 45 (a)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 11} displays the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53, including an image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A on the image display device 14 Perform the production. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “line notice A1” to “line notice A3” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₁₁ (1) in FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime X ₁₁ in "serif notice A1" - "speech announcement A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) (100% non-projecting State) and the protruding state (second state) are not made (0% protruding state). Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A1", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11} is "character a1" is "words a1 "(" Ichigo Senkinja! ") Is displayed on the image display device 14 with the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53, and the third decorative member 17C is set to“ standby ”as a movable member. A corresponding effect (notice effect) such as moving from “position 3” to “operation position 3” is executed. The sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the voice of “serif a1” from the voice output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), based on the operating lifetime _{X 11} 1 times pressing operation with respect to the first performance button 18A in is Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53, an effect image in which “Character a1” speaks “Serif a2” (“Hundred cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. Effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) to be displayed is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), based on the operating lifetime _{X 11} 1 times pressing operation with respect to the first performance button 18A in is Thus, unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53, an effect image in which “character a1” speaks “serif a3” (“do you have enough for both?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. Effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) is performed.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "serif notice A4", if you want to run a "dialogue notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{X 11.} That is, in “Serif notice A4” and “Serial notice A5”, an operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. A notice effect is displayed in which an effect image in which “a1” is speaking is displayed on the image display device 14. Note that the notice effects of “Serif notice A4” and “Serif notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image that states that “Serif a4” (“Do you get one car?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image of “speaking a5” (“Do you earn money?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops displaying the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) in FIG. 53 for generating the reach state to be performed on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect. “Character notice A” is a notice effect that notifies the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, similarly to “Serial notice A”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in “Change effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of “Character notice A5” is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the first effect button 18A is validated as shown in FIG. operation to set the validity period _{Y 11} (see FIG. 45 (b)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A. That is, the sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} performs control to display an effect image shown in FIGS. 53 without the image of the operation promoting notification (a-2-2) to the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and Y ₁₁ (1) of FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime Y ₁₁ of "character notice A1" - "character notice A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) (100% non-projecting State) and the protruding state (second state) are not made (0% protruding state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in FIG. 53 (a-2- As shown in 3), in the image display device 14, in addition to the already displayed “character a1”, a new effect “Character a2-1” is additionally displayed. Production control is performed to execute.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on the fact that one of the pressing is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} The image display device 14 performs effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) such as additionally displaying “Character a2-2” different from “Character a2-1”.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on the fact that one of the pressing is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} In the image display device 14, effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) of contents such as “Character a2-1” and “Character a2-3” different from “Character a2-2” are additionally displayed. I do.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "Chara notice A4", if you want to run a "character notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{Y 11.} That is, in “Character notice A4” and “Character notice A5”, a new character is added at a predetermined timing without displaying the operation promotion notification image as shown in FIG. 53 (a-2-2). Production control for executing the displayed announcement production is performed. The notice effects of “character notice A4” and “character notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  In the period (a-3) of “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and “character a3 (child A)”. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect appearing on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same two numerical values and “character a3 (A child)”. "Is performed, control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub-CPU 102a gives “special reach A1-1” as a special effect, which is more reliable than the “super reach A1-1”. “Notice A” is executed. “Development notice A” is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot, like “Serial notice A” and “Character notice A”. is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A6" also operating lifetime _{X 12} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A Setting is performed (see FIG. 45C).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 12,} as shown in FIG 53, including an image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (a-3-2) or (a-3-3) The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

However, the (a-3-2) of the effect image is for display when the operation lifetime X ₁₂ are the first performance button 18A and a projecting state, the operation of the first performance button 18A of the projecting state The image of the prompting operation prompting is included.

On the other hand, effect image (a-3-3) is intended to be displayed when the operation lifetime X ₁₂ are the first performance button 18A and a non-projecting state, the non-projecting state to the first performance button 18A The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation is included.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. 44B and X ₁₂ (1) in FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _12, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 50%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 50%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", during operation lifetime _{X 12,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 53 ( As shown in a-3-4), the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and the second decorative member 17B is emphasized in the image display device 14. Effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a1) for

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is being the first performance button 18A of the projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the second decorative member 17B is moved from “standby position 2” to “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control is performed to execute a corresponding production (development notice) such as display.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is being the first performance button 18A of the projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Accordingly, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14 is obtained. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A6", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

In the period (a-4) of “Super Reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. Control to display the effect image shown in (a-4) of FIG. 53, which is stopped in a state where the three special effect symbols are aligned to the same numerical value, by having the same numerical value.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A022 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the variation effect pattern A034 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 "conducts effect control for executing effect period (a-3) of the" super reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 13.}

  However, in the variation effect “variation effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops in the period (a-4) without changing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol. The effect control for displaying the effect image of (A-1) in FIG. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern A038 (first jackpot))
When a jackpot determination result in a low probability game state and non-time reduction gaming state "first big hit", "variation demonstration pattern A038" is selected, the sub CPU102a the timing T ₂₁ to shown in FIG. 52 (b) the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₂₄ from performing.

  FIG. 54 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 52 (b), the first effect button 18A, the first decorative member 17A, and the second decorative member 17B.

Sub CPU102 is the fluctuation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern A038" run "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 21} to time _{T 22} (b-1), from the timing _{T 22} to time _{T 23} in the period (b-2), executes the "normal reach A1-1", then the period from the timing _{T 23} to time _{T 24} (b-3) and in the period (b-4), "Special reach A1- Production control is performed to execute “1”.

The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image (a-1-1) in the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1), The effect image (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image a-1-2) is displayed. Then, the operation lifetime _{X 21,} as shown in _X 21 (1) of FIG. 54, the state of the first performance button 18A, while a and (100% non-projecting state) of the non-projecting state (first state) The protruding state (second state) is not set (0% protruding state).

The effect image of (b-1-3) in FIG. 54 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Serial notice A2”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11} is "character a1" is "dialogue a2 "(Hundred cars ??)" effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of (b-1-3) in FIG. 54 on the image display device 14. .

In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2), the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in FIG. 54 (b-2-1) corresponding to the effect image shown in FIG. 53 (a-2-1). After that, the effect image (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image (a-2-2) is displayed. Then, without performing the operation lifetime _{Y 21} in operation promotes notification, as shown in _Y 21 (1) of FIG. 54, the state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) ( (100% non-projecting state) and no projecting state (second state) (0% projecting state).

The effect image shown in (b-2-3) of FIG. 54 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A2”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} is, the "character a2-2" Add The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image (b-2-3) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the “character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs an effect control to display an effect image ((b-3-1) in FIG. 54) of the reach effect that attempts to capture" character c1 (thief) ".

In the case of executing “decision effect 1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a operates the operation effective period X in which the operation of the first effect button 18A is enabled as shown in FIG. ₂₂ is set (see FIG. 45D).

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 22,} as shown in FIG. 54, an effect image shown in including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (b-3-2) an image display device The effect displayed on 14 is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), this operation promotion notification image is made up of the characters “Press and hold!” Together with the projected first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

  Note that the image of the first effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may not indicate the state of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. For example, when the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period, the image of the first effect button 18A in the image display device 14 indicates the non-protruding state (first state). In addition, when the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation effective period, the image of the first effect button 18A in the image display device 14 indicates the protruding state (second state). There may be.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₂₂ (1) of FIG. as shown, in the operation lifetime _{X 22} in "decided effect A1", the state of the first performance button 18A, protruding state (second state) and (100% projecting state), the non-protruding state (first State) (0% non-protruding state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime _{X 22,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 54 ( As shown in b-3-3), the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is positioned below the front surface of the image display device 14 from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A2", do not set the operation lifetime _{X 22.} That is, in the “decision effect A2”, the operation promotion notification image as shown in (b-3-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is “ It is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, and the image display device 14 Effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash d1) is performed.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (b-4) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. As a result of the same numerical value, the three special performance symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and “batter” b1 in FIG. The effect control which displays the effect image to show on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A026 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state and “variation effect pattern A026” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the variation effect pattern A038 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 21} to time _{T 22} (b-1), in the period from the timing _{T 22} to time _{T 23} (b-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 "conducts effect control for executing effect period (b-3) of the" Special reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 23.}

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A026” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A026”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A in any case of executing “determination effect A1” and “determination effect A2” of “special reach A1-1”. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effects symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbols and the right symbols, and the state in which “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. By displaying the (B-1) effect image of 54, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production according to the fluctuation production pattern A042 (first jackpot))
When a jackpot determination result in a low probability game state and non-time reduction gaming state "first big hit", "variation demonstration pattern A042" is selected, the sub CPU102a the timing T ₃₁ shown in FIG. 52 (c) the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₃₅ from performing. FIG. 55 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 52 (c), the first effect button 18A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C.

Sub CPU102 is the fluctuation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern A042" run "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 32} (c-1), from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} in the period of (c-2), executes the "normal reach A1-1", then executes the "super reach A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 33} to time _{T 34} (c-3), the timing T period from ₃₄ to the timing _{T 35} (c-4), carries out an effect control so as to execute a "special reach A1-1" in the period (c-5).

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), the sub CPU 102a performs the process (c-1-1) of FIG. 55 corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) of FIG. The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Selif notice A” in FIG. 45A according to the execution rate of “Selif notice A” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. One of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A3” in “Symbol Variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the first effect button 18A is displayed. setting the operating lifetime _{X 31} to enable the operation (see FIG. 45 (a)).

Sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{X 31,} executes an effect to be displayed in Figure 55 including the image of the operation promoting notification to effect image (c-1-2) to the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “line notice A1” to “line notice A3” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. 44B and X ₃₁ (1) in FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime _{X 31} in "serif notice A1" - "speech announcement A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A in _X 31 (1) of FIG. 55, the non-protruding state (first state ) (100% non-protruding state) and not projecting state (second state) (0% projecting state). Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

The effect image of (c-1-3) in FIG. 55 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Serial notice A3”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 31} is "character a1" is "dialogue a3 "(Ten cars have been acquired?") The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of (c-1-3) in FIG. 55 on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first produces an effect image (c-2-1) in FIG. 55 corresponding to the effect image (a-2-1) in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “character notice A5” is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the first effect button 18A is validated as shown in FIG. 52 (c). An operation valid period Y ₃₁ is set (see FIG. 45B).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 31} does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A. That is, the sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{Y 31,} to execute an effect of displaying an effect image shown in FIGS. 55 without the image of the operation promoting notification (c-2-2) to the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a executes “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A3” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. In the operation effective period Y ₃₁ of “notice A1” to “character notice A3”, the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state (first state) as shown by Y ₃₁ (1) in FIG. It is left as it is (100% non-projecting state), and it does not become a projecting state (second state) (0% projecting state).

The effect image shown in (c-2-3) of FIG. 55 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Character notice A3”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 31} is, the "character a2-3" Add The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image (c-2-3) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development advance notice A” that encourages development to “special reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A6" also operating lifetime _{X 32} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A Setting is performed (see FIG. 45C).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 32,} as shown in FIG. 55, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (c-3-2) or (c-3-3) The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

However, the (c-3-2) of the effect image is for display when the operation lifetime X ₃₂ are the first performance button 18A and a projecting state, the operation of the first performance button 18A of the projecting state The image of the prompting operation prompting is included.

On the other hand, the effect image of (c-3-3) is displayed when the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state in the operation effective period _X32 , and the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state is displayed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation is included.

The sub CPU 102a shows the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6 in the variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₃₂ (1) of FIG. as described above, in the operation lifetime _{X 32,} the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 90%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 10%.

(C-3-4) of FIG. 55 shows an example of “development notice A1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", during operation lifetime _{X 32,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 55 ( c-3-4), the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and the second decorative member 17B is emphasized in the image display device 14. Effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a1) for

  During the “special reach A1-1” period (c-4), the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display “Character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs the effect control for displaying the effect image ((c-4-1) of FIG. 55) of the reach effect that tries to catch" character c1 (thief) ".

In the case of executing “decision effect 1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a operates the operation effective period X in which the operation of the first effect button 18A is enabled as shown in FIG. 52 (c). ₃₃ is set (see FIG. 45D).

Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 33,} as shown in FIG. 55, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (c-4-2) effect image shown in the image display device The effect control for performing the effect displayed on 14 is performed. This operation promotion notification image is made up of the letters “Press and hold!” Together with the projected first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” in “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₃₃ (1) of FIG. as shown, in the operation lifetime _{X 33} in "effect A1 decide", the state of the first performance button 18A, protruding state (second state) and (100% projecting state), the non-protruding state (first State) (0% non-protruding state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime _{X 33,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 55 ( c-4-3), the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “lower position” on the front side of the image display device 14 via the “operation position 1-1”. The image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. When the same numerical value is obtained, the three special performance symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and (c-) in FIG. 55 (c) showing that “character b1” catches “character c1”. Effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in 5) is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern A030 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A030” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A042” is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 32} (c-1), in the period from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} (c-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 ", run the" super reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 33} until the timing _{T 34,} directing the period of (c-4) of the" Special reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 34} Production control is performed to execute.

The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.
However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decoration member 17A from “standby position 1” in any case of executing “decision effect A1” or “decision effect A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effects symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbols and the right symbols, and the state in which “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. Effect control for displaying the effect image of 55 (C-1) is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  56 (a) to 56 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table for the variation effect pattern for loss in effect mode A in FIG. 44 (a) and the jackpot in effect mode A in FIG. 44 (b). It is the figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect classification determination table of the variation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the “line notice notice A” during the fluctuation effect of the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” for the “first jackpot” and the “fluctuation effect pattern A046” for the “second jackpot”, The execution rate of “Selif Notice A1” is the highest, and the execution rate gradually decreases in the order of “Selif Notice A2” to “Selif Notice A5”.
On the other hand, in the “serif notice A1” during the fluctuation effect of the “fluctuation effect pattern A022” for “losing” corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” and the “variation effect pattern A046”, The execution rate is the lowest, and the execution rate is gradually increased in the order of “Serif Notice A2” to “Serif Notice A5”.

  In addition, the “variable effect pattern A026” for “losing”, the “variable effect pattern A038” for “first jackpot”, and the “variable effect pattern A050” for “second jackpot” are also shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is set.

  In addition, the “variable effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variable effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variable effect pattern A054” for “second big hit” are also shown in FIG. As shown in (c), the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is set.

  That is, in “Serif Notice A1”, the reliability of the jackpot is highest in “Serif Notice A1” and gradually decreases in the order of “Serif Notice A2” to “Serif Notice A5”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the “Character notice A” during the changing effect of the “change effect pattern A034” for the “first jackpot” and the “change effect pattern A046” for the “second jackpot”. The execution ratio of “character notice A1” is the highest, and the execution ratio gradually decreases in the order of “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”.
On the other hand, “Character notice A1” in the “Character notice A1” during the fluctuation effect of “Change effect pattern A022” for “Lose” corresponding to the fluctuation effects of “Change effect pattern A034” and “Change effect pattern A046” The execution ratio is the lowest, and the execution ratio gradually increases in the order of “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”.

  In addition, the “variable effect pattern A026” for “losing”, the “variable effect pattern A038” for “first jackpot”, and the “variable effect pattern A050” for “second jackpot” are also shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set.

  In addition, the “variable effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variable effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variable effect pattern A054” for “second big hit” are also shown in FIG. As shown in (c), the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set.

  That is, in “Character Notice A”, the reliability for the big hit is “Character Notice A1”, and gradually decreases in the order of “Character Notice A2” to “Character Notice A5”.

  Then, as can be seen from the determination values (execution ratios) of the first big hit special pattern fluctuation patterns of the stop symbol data “10H” and “20H” shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. In this variation effect pattern, the reliability for the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), in any of “Serif notice A” and “Character notice A”, “variable effect pattern A034”, “variable effect pattern A038”, “variable effect pattern” In the order of “A042”, the execution ratio of the high-reliability notices (“Serif notice A1” and “Serif notice A2”) gradually increases.

  Similarly, as can be seen from the determination values (execution ratios) of the second big hit special symbol fluctuation patterns of the stop symbol data “11H” and “21H” shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. In the variation effect pattern, the reliability for the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variation effect pattern A046”, “variation effect pattern A050”, and “variation effect pattern A054”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), in any of “Serif notice A” and “Character notice A”, “variable effect pattern A046”, “variable effect pattern A050”, “variable effect pattern” The execution ratio of the high-reliability notices ("Serial notice A1", "Serif notice A2", "Character notice A1", "Character notice A2") gradually increases in the order of "A054".

Further, regarding “Development notice A”, “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” for “First jackpot”, “Variation effect pattern A046” for “Second jackpot”, “Fluctuation effect pattern A022” for “Lost”. In any variation production, the “reach reach 1-1” does not develop to the next reach.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in both the “variable effect pattern A034” for “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern A046” for “second jackpot”, the first in the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A3” in which the effect button 18A is controlled to be in the projecting state, and the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period “development notice A4 ”To“ development notice A6 ”are set to the same execution ratio, and in the“ variation effect pattern A022 ”for“ losing ”, the“ development notice A1 ”to“ development notice A3 ”are executed more than the execution ratio. The execution ratios of “Notice A4” to “Development Notice A6” are set higher.

  In addition, the “variable effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variable effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variable effect pattern A054” for “second big hit” are also shown in FIG. As shown in (c), the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set.

In any variation production of “variation production pattern A042” for “first jackpot”, “variation production pattern A054” for “second jackpot”, and “variation production pattern A030” for “losing” From “reach A1-1” to the next “special reach A1-1”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), both the “variable effect pattern A042” for the “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern A054” for the “second jackpot” are displayed in the first operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A3” in which the effect button 18A is controlled to the protruding state is the “development” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-protruding state during the operation effective period. “Advance notice A4” to “Development notice A6” are set to be higher than the total execution rate, and even in “Fluctuation effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the execution ratio of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A3” Is set higher than the execution ratio of “Development Notice A4” to “Development Notice A6”.

It should be noted that in all the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 44 (b), the first development button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio is set to be higher than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period.
On the other hand, in all the loss variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 44 (a), the execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A3” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period is set higher than the total value.
In other words, in the variable effect executed based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot, by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state rather than the advance notice executed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state. The advance notice to be executed has a higher execution ratio.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (c), in any of the variation production pattern for “losing”, the variation production pattern for “first big hit”, and the variation production pattern for “second big hit” The “decided effect A1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect A2” in which the operation effective period is not set. The execution ratio of “A1” and “Decision effect A2” is set.

(Specific example of variation production in production mode B)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to thirty times of the variation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state will be described.
FIG. 57 (a) shows the temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 57 (b) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 57 (c) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern B019 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern B019” is selected in the first to thirty times of the change in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. The effect control for executing the fluctuating effect from timing T ₄₀₁ to timing T ₄₀₃ shown in FIG.

  FIG. 58 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 and the first effect button 18A in the variation effect shown in FIG.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 401} to the timing _{T 402} (d-1) and the period (d-2), the period from the timing _{T 402} to the timing _{T 403} (d -3) and the period (d-4), the effect control for executing “Special Character Reach B1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of the “symbol change B3-1”.

  In the period (d-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (d-1) of FIG. 58 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. To control.

  Then, during the period (d-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of the reach in FIG. Production control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development notice B” that envisages development to “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B1”, “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variation effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development Notice B2”.

The sub CPU 102a, regardless of whether to execute “development notice B1” or “development notice B2”, makes the operation effective for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation means in “symbol variation B3-1”. A period _X41 is set. In the operation effective period X ₄₁ , the reach effect such as whether the reach state is generated by stopping the special effect design (the right design) to be stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect design (the left design) stopped first. Set during production.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 41,} as shown in FIG. 58, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

However, effect image (d-2-1) is intended to be displayed when a projecting state of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime X ₄₁ in "Development notice B1", the first effect of the projecting state An image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button 18A is included.

On the other hand, effect image (d-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₄₁ in "Development notice B2", a non-projecting state first It includes an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the 1 effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” in “variation effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46B and X ₄₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _41, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 90%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 10%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect A corresponding effect (development notice) is executed such that an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) superimposed on the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", the operation during the lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b2 (orange)) is displayed on the image display device 14 overlaid on the special effect pattern of Production control is performed.

FIG. 58 (d-2-3) shows an example of “development notice B1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime _{X 41,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 58 ( As shown in d-2-3), a corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of reach reach effect.

  In addition, unlike the case of (d-2-3) in FIG. 58, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image (effect b2) in an overlapping manner with the special effect design of reach reach effect in the “evolution notice B2”. Production control for executing (corresponding production) is performed.

  In the period (d-3) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the special character “Character s1 (warrior)”. “D” on the image display device 14 in FIG. 58 (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in the content of fighting the special character “Character p1 (enemy warrior)”. Perform production control to be displayed.

Then, during the period (d-4) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (the middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (D-4) in FIG. 58 showing that “Character s1” defeats “Character p1” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. The effect control to display the effect image shown in FIG.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern B013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern B013” is selected in the first to thirty times of the fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period from the timing _{T 401} to the timing _{T 402} (d-2), the period from the timing _{T 402} to the timing _{T 403} In (d-3) and period (d-4), “Special Character Reach B1-1” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B019”, the sub CPU 102a does not have the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols in “special character reach B1-1”. Effect control is performed to display an effect image (D-1) in a state where “Character s1” is overthrown by “Character p1”. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern B021 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern B021” is selected in the first to thirty-time fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. The effect control for executing the fluctuating effect from timing T ₅₀₁ to timing T ₅₀₃ shown in FIG.

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B021" run "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-1) and the period (e-2), timing In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) from T ₅₀₂ to timing T ₅₀₃ , effect control for executing “special character reach B2-1” is performed.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-1) and the period (e-2), the period from the timing _{T 502} to the timing _{T 503} (e -3) and the period (e-4), the effect control for executing “Special Character Reach B2-1” is performed.

  In the period (e-1) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images that change a plurality of special effect symbols.

  In the period (e-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. 59 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. The production control is performed.

  Then, during the period (e-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. Display of the effect images (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Production control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute “development notice B” as a special effect for encouraging the development to “special character reach B1-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B1” and “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in the “variation effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed so as to execute any one of “evolution notice B2”.

The sub CPU 102a, regardless of whether to execute “development notice B1” or “development notice B2”, makes the operation effective for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation means in “symbol variation B3-1”. A period X ₅₁ is set. Operation lifetime X ₅₁ has said that if the future or special performance symbol to try to stop (right symbol) is stopped at the same numerical value as a special performance symbol that stops first (left symbol) is reach state occurs, reach tilt Set during production.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 51,} as shown in FIG. 59, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

However, effect image (e-2-1) is intended to be displayed when the first performance button 18A and the projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₅₁ in "Development notice B1", the first effect of the projecting state An image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button 18A is included.

On the other hand, effect image (e-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₅₁ in "Development notice B2", a non-projecting state first It includes an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the 1 effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” in the “variation effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46B and X ₅₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _51, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 95%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 5%.

(E-2-3) in FIG. 59 shows an example of “development notice B1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime _{X 51,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 59 ( As shown in e-2-3), control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on a special effect design of reach reach effect. .

  Further, the sub-CPU 102a, in the “development notice B2”, displays an effect image (effect b2) superimposed on the special effect design of reach reach, unlike (e-2-3) in FIG. 59. Control to execute (correspondence effect).

  In the period (e-3) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value and the special character “Character s2 (warrior)”. Effect control is performed for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 59 of the content of “” fighting the special character “Character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a performs control so that “decision effect B” is executed in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a controls to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed to execute one of the “decision effects B2”.

(E-3-2) and (e-3-3) in FIG. 59 show examples of “decision effect B1”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect B1", the "special characters reach B2-1", it sets the operating lifetime _{X 52} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A is an operation means. Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 52,} the effect of displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification to prompt the operator to first performance button 18A of the protruding state ((e-3-2 in FIG. 59)) Run. As shown in X ₅₂ (1) of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a sets the state of the first effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) in the operation effective period X ₅₂ .

Sub CPU102a, in this "decided effect B1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 52,} (e-3-3) of FIG. 59 As shown in FIG. 3, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” to the image display device 14. The “decision effect” (corresponding effect) is executed, such as moving to “operation position 1-2”, which is the lower position of the front face.

In the period (e-4) of “special character reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (E-4) in FIG. 59 showing that “Character s2” defeats “Character p2” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in this “decision effect B”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect B”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect B” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

Then, during the period (e-3) of “Special Character Reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) on which the special effect symbol (the middle symbol) being changed is stopped and displayed first. (E-4) in FIG. 59 showing that “Character s2” defeats “Character p2” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to fluctuation effect pattern B015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern B015” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-2), the period from the timing _{T 502} to the timing _{T 503} Production control is performed so that “special character reach B2-1” is executed in (e-3) and period (e-4).

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B015” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. Control to execute one of the “decision effects B2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols having the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s2” is defeated by “Character p2”. Effect control for displaying the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. 59 is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern B023 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern B023” is selected in the first to thirty-time fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) To perform a fluctuating effect from timing T ₆₀₁ to timing T ₆₀₃ shown in FIG.

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B023" run "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} (f-1) and the period (f-2), timing In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) from T ₆₀₂ to timing T ₆₀₃ , effect control is performed so that “special character reach B3-1” is executed.

In variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B023", effect contents of the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} is "change effect pattern It is the same as the production content of “symbol variation B3-1” of “B019”.

Sub CPU102a the operation lifetime _{X 61} to shown in FIG. 57 (c) corresponds to the operation lifetime _{X 41} shown in FIG. 57 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (f-3) of the “special character reach B3-1” and the special character “character s3 (warrior)”. "(Not shown) performs effect control so that an effect image of content fighting the special character" Character p3 (enemy warrior) "(not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed.
Incidentally, the sub CPU102a is the "decided effect B1", sets the operating lifetime _{X 62} as shown in FIG. 57 (c).

In the period (f-4) of “special character reach B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. As a result, the image display device 14 displays an effect image informing that “Character s3” has defeated “Character p3” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value. Control to display on the screen.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern B017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern B017” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects FIG. Effect control is performed so as to execute a variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B023” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} (f-2), the period from the timing _{T 602} to the timing _{T 603} Production control is performed so as to execute “Special Character Reach B3-1” in (f-3) and period (f-4).

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B3-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols to be the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s3” is defeated by “Character p3”. By displaying the effect image (not shown), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  FIGS. 60A to 60C are respectively a part of the special effect type determination table for the variation effect pattern for loss in effect mode B in FIG. 46A and the big hit in effect mode B in FIG. 46B. It is the figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect classification determination table of the variation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), when “Development notice B” is described, in the variation production of “fluctuation production pattern B005” for “losing”, “design variation B3-1” does not develop to reach.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60A, in the “variable effect pattern B005” for “losing”, the execution ratio of “development notice B2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period. Is set to a high value of 95%, and “development notice B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the “variation effect pattern B013”, which is a variation effect pattern for “losing” and develops from “symbol change B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” is 70. %, And the execution rate of “Development Notice B2” is set to 30%.

  In the “variation effect pattern B019”, which is a variation effect pattern for “first jackpot” and develops from “symbol variation B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” Is set to 90%, and the execution ratio of “Development Notice B2” is set to 10%.

  Further, in the “variation effect pattern B025” that is a variation effect pattern for “second big hit” and develops from “symbol variation B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” Is set to 88%, and the execution rate of “Development Notice B2” is set to 12%.

  In addition, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern B005”, “variable effect pattern B015” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern B021” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “variable effect pattern B027” for the “second jackpot”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set as shown in FIG.

  Also, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern B005”, “fluctuation effect pattern B017” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern B023” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “variation effect pattern B029” for the “second jackpot”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set as shown in FIG.

In addition, in all the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 46 (b), the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is The first effect button 18A is set in a non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and is set higher than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice B2”.
On the other hand, in all the variation effect patterns for loss shown in FIG. 46 (a), the operation is performed more than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of “development notice B2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the effective period is set higher.
In other words, in the variable effect executed based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot, by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state rather than the advance notice executed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state. The advance notice to be executed has a higher execution ratio.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, in any of the variation production pattern for “losing”, the variation production pattern for “first big hit”, and the variation production pattern for “second big hit” The “decided effect B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect B2” in which the operation effective period is not set. The execution ratio of “B1” and “Decision effect B2” is set.

(Specific example of variation production in production mode C)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C set in the variations 31 to 74th in the high probability game state and the short time game state will be described.
FIG. 61 (a) shows a temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 61 (b) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 61 (c) shows the temporal effect of the variation effect that is executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern C019 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern C019” is selected in the 31st to 74th variations in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. The control for executing the fluctuating effect from the timing T ₇₀₁ to the timing T ₇₀₃ shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 61A, the first effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period from the timing _{T 701} to the timing _{T 702} (g-2), the period from the timing _{T 702} to the timing _{T 703} (g -3) and period (g-4), “attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (g-1) of the “symbol change C3-1”.

  In the period (g-1) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (g-1) of FIG. 62 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. Execute.

  Then, during the period (g-2) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. 62. Display image of effect images of (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Control to display on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice C” as a special effect, encouraging the development to “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice C1”, “development notice C1”, “development notice C1” according to the execution ratio of “development notice C” in the “variation effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of “Development notice C2” is executed.

The sub CPU 102a, regardless of whether the “development notice C1” or the “development notice C2” is executed, the operation valid that activates the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation means in the “symbol change C3-1”. Period X ₇₁ is set. In the operation effective period X ₇₁ , the reach effect such as whether or not the special effect design (the right design) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect design (the left design) stopped first and the reach state occurs. Set during production.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 71,} as shown in FIG. 62, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “press the button !!” together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.

However, effect image (g-2-1) is intended to be displayed when a projecting state of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime X ₇₁ in "Development notice C1", the first effect of the projecting state An image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button 18A is included.

On the other hand, effect image (g-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₇₁ in "Development notice C2", the non-projecting state first It includes an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the 1 effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” in the “variation effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48B and X ₇₁ (1) of FIG. As illustrated, in the operation effective period _X71 , the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state at a rate of 92% and is set to the non-projecting state at a rate of 8%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C1" during operation lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect A corresponding effect (development notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) superimposed on the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14. .

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C2", the operation during the lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c2 (red)) is displayed on the image display device 14 overlaid on the special effect pattern of To do.

  In the period (g-3) of “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the character “character b1 (１)” is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG. 62 on the image display device 14 such as sprinting and attacking the enemy.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

62 (g-3-2) and (g-3-3) show examples of “decision effect C1”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect C1", in "attack reach C1-1", it sets the operating lifetime _{X 72} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A is an operation means. In operation effective period X _72, operation promotion notification (notification promote the image along with the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge of projected state consisting of the letter "before you press!" To promote the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player ). In addition, as shown in X ₇₂ (1) of FIG. 62, in the operation effective period X ₇₂ , the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state (second state).

Sub CPU102a is, in the "decided effect C1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 72,} in the image display device 14, "flash c1" The first decorative member 17A as a movable member is displayed from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”, and the “operation position” which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 is displayed. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) is executed, such as moving to “1-2”.

  In addition, in the “decision effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 49B, and the effect image of “flash c1” that wins the jackpot on the image display device 14 is displayed. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” through “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing to “motion position” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. A content determination effect (corresponding effect) such as moving to “1-2” is executed.

  In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “decision effect C”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect C”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect C” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

Then, in the period (g-4) of the “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (G-4) in FIG. 62 which notifies that “Character b1” “destroyed” the enemy while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern C013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern C013” is selected in the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. A variation effect similar to the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 701} to the timing _{T 702} (g-1) and the period (g-2), the period from the timing _{T 702} (g-3 ) “Attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character b1” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image (G-1), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern C021 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern C021” is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) To produce a fluctuating effect from timing T ₈₀₁ to timing T ₈₀₃ .

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C021" run "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 801} to the timing _{T 802} (h-1) and time (h-2), timing In the period (h-3) and period (h-4) from T ₈₀₂ to timing T ₈₀₃ , “attack reach C2-1” is executed.

In variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C021", effect contents of the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and time (h-2) from the timing _{T 801} to the timing _{T 802} is "change effect pattern This is the same as the effect content of “symbol variation C3-1” of “C019”. Figure 61 (b) to the operating lifetime _{X 81} shown corresponds to the operation lifetime _{X 71} shown in FIG. 61 (a).

  During the “attack reach C2-1” period (h-3), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value, and the “character q2 (samurai)” is running. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack.

The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect during the period (h-3) of “attack reach C2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.
Sub CPU102a, when executing the "decided effect C1" in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C021" sets the operating lifetime _{X 82} as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Operation In lifetime _{X 82,} and the state of the first performance button 18A protruding state (second state).

Then, during the period (h-4) of “attack reach C2-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q2” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to variation production pattern C015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern C015” is selected at the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 801} to the timing _{T 802} (h-1) and time (h-2), the period from the timing _{T 802} (h-3 ) “Attack reach C2-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of which of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and also notifies that “Character q2” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern C023 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern C023” is selected in the variation 31 to 74th time in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 61 (c). ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₉₀₁ to timing T ₉₀₃ .

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023" run "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} (i-1) and the period (i-2), timing executing the "attack reach C3-1" in the period from T ₉₀₂ to the timing _{T 903} (i-3) and the period (i-4).

In variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023", effect contents of the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} is "change effect pattern This is the same as the effect content of “symbol variation C3-1” of “C019”.
That is, in the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2), the sub CPU 102a performs the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) in FIG. Is displayed.
The operation effective period X ₉₁ shown in FIG. 61 (c) corresponds to the operation effective period X ₇₁ shown in FIG. 61 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the “attack reach C3-1” period (i-3), and “Character q3 (Ronin)” sprints. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack.

The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.
Sub CPU102a, when executing the "decided effect C1" in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023" sets the operating lifetime _{X 92} as shown in FIG. 61 (c).

Then, during the period (i-4) of “attack reach C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q3” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.
(Variation production related to variation production pattern C017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern C017” is selected at the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C023” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} (i-1) and the period (i-2), the period from the timing _{T 902} (i-3 The “attack reach C3-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decoration member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or the “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C3-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character q3” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  63 (a) to 63 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table for the variation effect pattern for loss in effect mode C in FIG. 48 (a) and the big hit in effect mode C in FIG. 48 (b). It is the figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect classification determination table of the variation effect pattern for small hits.

As for “development notice C”, the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C005” for “losing” does not evolve from “symbol variation C3-1” to reach.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63A, in this “variable effect pattern C005”, the execution ratio of “development notice C2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period is 95%. The “development notice C1”, which is set to a high value and is controlled so that the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period, is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the “change effect pattern C013”, which is a variation effect pattern for “losing” and develops from “symbol change C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is 70%. And the execution rate of “development notice C2” is set to 30%.

  And in the “change effect pattern C019”, which is a change effect pattern for “first jackpot” and develops from “symbol change C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is The execution rate of “Development notice C2” is set to 8%.

  Further, in the “variation effect pattern C025” that is a variation effect pattern for “second big hit” and develops from “symbol variation C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is It is set to 90%, and the execution rate of “Development notice C2” is set to 10%.

  In addition, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern C005”, “fluctuation effect pattern D015” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D021” for “first big hit”, and “ In the “variable effect pattern D027” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 63B, the execution ratios of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are set.

  In addition, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern C005”, “variable effect pattern C017” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern C023” for “first big hit”, and “ In the “variation effect pattern C029” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 63C, the execution ratios of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are set.

Note that, in all the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 48 (b), the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice C1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is The first performance button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and is set higher than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice C2”.
On the other hand, in all the fluctuating effect patterns for loss shown in FIG. 48 (a), the operation is performed more than the total value of the execution ratio of “development notice C1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of “development notice C2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the effective period is set higher.
In other words, in the variable effect executed based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot, by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state rather than the advance notice executed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state. The advance notice to be executed has a higher execution ratio.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b) and 63 (c), in any of the variation effect pattern for “losing”, the variation effect pattern for “first jackpot”, and the variation effect pattern for “second jackpot”. The “decided effect C1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect C2” in which the operation effective period is not set. The execution ratio of “C1” and “Decision effect C2” is set.

Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control so as to execute a change effect having a janken effect with the content that two characters perform “Janken” as the change effect.

  FIG. 64A is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D019”. FIG. 64B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D022”. FIG. 64C is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D25”.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern D019 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern D019” is selected in the 75th to 84th changes in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. The effect control for executing the fluctuating effect from the timing T ₁₀₀₁ to the timing T ₁₀₀₄ shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 64A, the first effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

The sub CPU 102a performs “symbol variation D1-1” in a period (j−1) to a period (j-3) from timing T ₁₀₀₁ to timing T _1002, and a period (j from timing T ₁₀₀₂ to timing T _1003). -4) In the period (j-5), production control is performed so that “Janken Reach D1-1 (Win)” is executed.

  In the period (j-1) of the “symbol variation D1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. 65 that changes a plurality of special effect symbols, and also in the period (j-2). Then, the effect control is performed so that the effect image of (j-2) in FIG. 65 in which the character display “Janken wins twice!” Is superimposed on the display of the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D1-1” period (j-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. 65 and (j-3-) in FIG. 65, which shows that the character “Friendly r1” who is an ally character and “Character u1” who is an opponent character perform the first round of junk. Effect control for displaying the effect image of 1) or (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the effect of reach reach, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in the effect images of (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) in FIG. 65, “Janken reach D1- Execute “Development Notice D” encouraging the development to “1 (win)”. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, valid during the period (j-3) when executing either the “evolution notice D1” or the “development notice D2” as the special effect. The operation valid period _X101 to be set is set.

Sub CPU102a, in operation valid period _{X 101} controls to perform operations promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player. Sub CPU102a, the protruding state in the operation lifetime _{X 101,} as the "development notice D1" a of Figure 65, if (j-3-1) are shown as projecting state of the first performance button 18A (a second state) If the “promotion notice D2” is executed, the first effect button 18A is controlled as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. 65. Control is performed to execute an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state as the non-protruding state (first state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing the "development notice D1" in operation valid period _{X 101,} with the first performance button 18A protruding state (second state), in FIG. 65 (j-3-1 As shown in FIG. 5A, the first character button 18A in the protruding state and the image of the timer gauge and the “press!” Button are displayed together with the effect image of “Character r1” and “Character u1” being “Janken” in the introduction part of Jeanken. The effect of displaying the effect image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the first effect button 18 </ b> A composed of the characters “!” Is executed on the image display device 14.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing the "development notice D2", in operation valid period _{X 101,} with the first performance button 18A and a non-protruding state (first state), in FIG. 65 (j- As shown in 3-2), the image of the first projecting button 18A and the timer gauge in the non-protruding state is displayed together with the effect image in which “character r1” and “character u1” are “Janken” in the introduction part of the image. And the effect which displays on the image display apparatus 14 the effect image of the operation promotion alerting | promoting operation of 1st effect button 18A which consists of a character of "Press!" Is performed.
Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” in “variation effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50B and X ₁₀₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _101, a first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 92%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 8%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D1", during operation lifetime X _101, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect A special effect design and an effect image (effect j1 (blue)) (FIG. 65 (j-) of FIG. 65) superimposed on the effect image of the content that “character r1” wins “character u1” in the first round of Janken. 3-3)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D2", the operation during the lifetime X _101, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect Special effect design and an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) superimposed on the effect image of the content that “Character r1” wins “Character u1” in the first round of Janken ((j in FIG. 65) 3-3)) is displayed on the image display device 14 and a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

  As shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a performs two identical operations in “Janken reach D1-1 (win)” in the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1”. When numerical special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

The sub CPU 102a operates in the operation effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 18A is valid in the period (j-4) regardless of the case where “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Y ₁₀₁ is set. In operation lifetime _{Y 101,} sub CPU102a does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player. In operation lifetime _{Y 101,} sub CPU102a, as shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 65, having no effect images the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player indicate.

Further, the sub CPU 102a executes the execution ratio of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3” in “Fluctuation effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50B and Y ₁₀₁ (1 in FIG. As shown in (), in the operation effective period Y ₁₀₁ , the first effect button 18A is brought into a non-projecting state at a rate of 100%.

(J-4-2) of FIG. 65 shows an example in which “character notice D1” is executed. In "Character notice D1", sub CPU102a, based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101} is, in (j-4-2) of FIG. 65 As shown in the figure, control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying “Character d1” which is a support character of “Character r1” on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU102a, based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101} is, as cheering character "character r1", the "character notice D2", " Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying “character d2” and “character d3” in “character notice D3”.

  Then, after executing this “character notice D”, the sub CPU 102a performs “character r1” and “character u1” as shown in (j-4-3) and (j-4-4) of FIG. Effects control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image with the content of performing the second round of Janken.

  As shown in the effect image of (j-4-3) in FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” in the effect of the second round of janken.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

When executing the “decision effect D1” as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation to validate the operation of the first effect button 18A during the period (j-4) of the “Janken Reach D1-1 (win)”. An effective period _X102 is set. Sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{X 102,} execution ratio and figures "decided effect D1", "decided effect D2" in set in special effect type determination table "variation demonstration pattern D019" in FIG. 50 (b) As indicated by 65 X ₁₀₂ (1), the state of the first effect button 18A is a protruding state (second state). The sub CPU102a, in this operation valid period _{X 102,} as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 65, "Character r1" and "character u1" and is "rock", "scissors", "par In the effect image of the state before issuing any of "", the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Press!" Are displayed on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state. Production control is performed so as to display an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation.

Sub CPU102a is the "decided effect D1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 102,} in the image display device 14, the winning of the jackpot The effect image of the flashing “flash d1” is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as the movable member from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1”, and is positioned below the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with the content of moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. And moving to “motion position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front side of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of “flash d 2” on the image display device 14 that wins a big hit. The determined production (corresponding production) is executed.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect D”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect D” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

After executing the “decision effect D” in the period (j-4) of the “janken reach D1-1 (winning)”, the sub CPU 102a performs the janken 2 as shown in the effect image (j-4-5) in FIG. After displaying the effect image of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” by “Character r1” issuing “Cho” and “Character u1” issuing “Par” in the round, the period (j 65) As shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 65, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) in the same state as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) previously stopped and displayed 65, the effect control for displaying the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 65 that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to fluctuation effect pattern D010 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern D010” is selected at the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays the result shown in FIG. The variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a plays “symbol D1-1” in the period (j−1) to period (j-3) from the timing T ₁₀₀₁ to the timing T ₁₀₀₂ , that is, “Character r1” matches the “Character u1” once. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)” after executing the variation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning with the eye janken. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (negative)", as well as fluctuations rendition of the period (j-4) from the timing _{T 1002} of "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (win)", "character r1" is "character u1 ”And reach production including the production of performing the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as a special effect in the period (j-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D019” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D010” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a executes “determination effect D1” in “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)” and then, as shown in FIG. 65 (J-1). In addition, in the second round of Janken, after “Character r1” gave “Choki” and “Character u1” gave “Goo”, an image of “Character r1” losing to “Character u1” was displayed. As shown in the effect image (J-2) in FIG. 65, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the fluctuation effect pattern D022 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern D022” is selected in the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₁₁₀₁ to timing T ₁₁₀₃ .

The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D2-1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T ₁₁₀₁ to the timing T _1102, and the period (k from the timing T ₁₁₀₂ to the timing T _1103). -4) and “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” in the period (k-5).

  In the “symbol variation D2-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (k-1). In the period of “symbol variation D2-1” (k-2), an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 3 wins !!” is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D2-1” period (k-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub-CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D2-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, valid during the period (k-3) when executing either of the "development notice D1" or "development notice D2" as the special effect. The operation effective period X ₁₁₁ to be set is set.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” in the “variation effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. 50B and X ₁₁₁ (1) in FIG. As shown, in the operation effective period _X111 , the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state at a rate of 96% and is set to the non-projecting state at a rate of 4%.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” in the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

The sub CPU 102a operates the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 18A is valid in the period (k-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Y ₁₁₁ is set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Character r1” and “Character u1” in the second and third rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “decision effect D” in the third round of the Janken game in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

When executing the “decision effect D1” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect of the third round of Janken in the latter half of the “Janken Reach D2-1 (win)” period (k-4). setting the operating lifetime _{X 112} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A. In the operation effective period X ₁₁₂ of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a outputs “goo”, “choki”, or “par” in the third round of Janken with “Chara r1” and “Cara u1”. In the effect image of the previous state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, which includes the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Press!” Production control is performed so as to display the image.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. And moving to “motion position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front side of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of “flash d 2” on the image display device 14 that wins a big hit. The determined production (corresponding production) is executed.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Effect D” during the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, produces an effect of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” in the third round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (k-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that have been stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern D013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state in the 75th to 84th times and “fluctuation effect pattern D013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 64 (b). The variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a plays “symbol variation D2-1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T ₁₁₀₁ to the timing T ₁₁₀₂ , that is, “Character r1” matches the “Character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D2-1 (Lose)” after executing the effect of changing the special effect design including the effect of winning with the eye janken. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (negative)", as well as fluctuations rendition of period (k-4) from the timing _{T 1102} of "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (win)", "character r1" is "character u1 "The second round and the third round of Janken", "Character r1" wins "Character u1" in the second round of Janken, and "Character r1" loses to "Character u1" in the third round of Janken. Execute the reach production.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as the special effect in the period (k−4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D022” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)” and then “Character r1” is “ After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production according to the fluctuation production pattern D025 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D025” is selected in the 75th to 84th variations in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₁₂₀₁ to timing T ₁₂₀₃ .

The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l−1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T ₁₂₀₁ to the timing T _1202, and the period from the timing T ₁₂₀₂ to the timing T ₁₂₀₃ (l -4) and “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)” in the period (1-5).

  In the “symbol variation D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect similar to the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (l-1). In the period (1-2) of “symbol variation D3-1”, an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 4 wins!” Is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is displayed as an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D3-1” period (l-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

The sub CPU 102a makes the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is an operation means, valid during the period (l-3), regardless of whether the “development notice D1” or the “development notice D2” is executed as a special effect. The operation effective period X ₁₂₁ to be set is set.

The sub CPU 102a operates the operation effective period X _{121 as} shown in the execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D025” in the “variation effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Then, the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state at a rate of 100%.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

The sub CPU 102a operates the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 18A is valid in the period (l-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Y ₁₂₁ is set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Charar1” and “Character u1” in the second through fourth rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” in the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of the period (l-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” as a special effect, in the period when the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of this “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” period (l-4) is performed. setting the operating lifetime _{X 122} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A. In the operation effective period X ₁₂₂ of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a outputs “goo”, “choki”, or “par” for “Janken” fourth round of “Chara r1” and “Cara u1”. In the effect image of the previous state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, which includes the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Press!” Production control is performed so as to display the image.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. And moving to “motion position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front side of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of “flash d 2” on the image display device 14 that wins a big hit. The determined production (corresponding production) is executed.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Production D” during period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, produces an appearance that “Character r1” wins over “Character u1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (1-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern D016 (losing))
In the case of the 75-84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, when the jackpot determination result is “losing” and “variable effect pattern D016” is selected, the sub CPU 102a selects “variable effect pattern D025”. A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a plays “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T ₁₂₀₁ to the timing T ₁₂₀₂ , that is, the “character r1” matches the “character u1” once. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D3-1 (Lose)” after executing a variation effect of a special effect symbol including an effect of winning with an eye Janken. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (negative)", as well as fluctuations rendition of period (l-4) from the timing _{T 1202} of "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (win)", "character r1" is "character u1 ”And the reach production including the production of performing the second round to the fourth round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as the special effect in the period (l-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D025” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D016” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, and then “Character r1” becomes “Character r1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  66 (a) to 66 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table for the variation effect pattern for loss in effect mode D in FIG. 50 (a) and the jackpot in effect mode D in FIG. 50 (b), respectively. It is the figure which extracted and comprised a part of special effect classification determination table of the variation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), regarding the “development notice D”, the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D001” for “losing” does not develop from the “design variation D1-1” to reach.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66A, in the “fluctuation effect pattern D001” for “losing”, the execution ratio of “development notice D2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period. Is set to a high value of 95%, and “development notice D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the “variation effect pattern D010”, which is a variation effect pattern for “losing” and develops from “symbol change D1-1” to “janken reach D1-1 (losing)”, the execution ratio of “development notice D1” Is set to 70%, and the execution rate of “Development Notice D2” is set to 30%.

  The variation presentation pattern for “first jackpot” is “variation presentation pattern D019” developed from “symbol variation D1-1” to “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. The execution ratio is set to 92%, and the execution ratio of “Development notice D2” is set to 8%.

  In addition, in the “variation effect pattern D028” that is a variation effect pattern for “second jackpot” and develops from “symbol variation D1-1” to “Janken reach (win)”, the execution ratio of “development notice D1” is It is set to 90%, and the execution ratio of “Development notice D2” is set to 10%.

  In addition, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern D001”, “variable effect pattern D013” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern D022” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “variable effect pattern D031” for “second jackpot”, the execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

  Furthermore, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern D001”, “variable effect pattern D016” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern D025” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “variable effect pattern D034” for the “second jackpot”, the execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

Note that, in all the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 50 (b), the total value of the execution ratio of “development notice D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is The first performance button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period, and is set to be higher than the total value of the execution ratios of “Development notice D2”.
On the other hand, in all the lost variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 50 (a), the operation is performed more than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of “development notice D2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the effective period is set higher.
In other words, in the variable effect executed based on the jackpot determination result being a jackpot, by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state rather than the advance notice executed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state. The advance notice to be executed has a higher execution ratio.

Also, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the “Character notice D” during the changing effect of the “change effect pattern D019” for the “first jackpot” and the “change effect pattern D028” for the “second jackpot”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” is the highest, and the execution ratio gradually decreases in the order of “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.
On the other hand, “Character notice D1” in “Character notice D1” during the fluctuation effect of “Change effect pattern D010” for “Lose” corresponding to the fluctuation effects of “Change effect pattern D019” and “Change effect pattern D028” The execution ratio is the lowest, and the execution ratio gradually increases in the order of “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.
That is, in “Character notice D”, the reliability for the jackpot is “Character notice D1” is the highest, and gradually decreases in the order of “Character notice D2” and “Character notice D3”.

  In addition, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern D001”, “variable effect pattern D013” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern D022” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern D031” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 66B, execution ratios of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are set.

  Furthermore, compared with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variable effect pattern D001”, “variable effect pattern D016” for “losing”, “variable effect pattern D025” for “first big hit”, and “ In the “variable effect pattern D034” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 66C, execution ratios of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are set.

  Then, as can be seen from the determination values (execution ratios) of the special symbol variation patterns for the first jackpot of the stop symbol data “10H” and “20H” shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. In the variation effect pattern, the reliability for the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variation effect pattern D019”, “variation effect pattern D022”, and “variation effect pattern D025”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), in the “character notice D”, the “relative effect pattern D019”, “variable effect pattern D022”, and “variable effect pattern D025” are gradually increased in order of reliability. The execution ratio of the notice ("Character notice D1") is high.

  Similarly, as can be seen from the determination values (execution ratio) of the special symbol variation pattern of the second jackpot of the stop symbol data “11H” and “21H” shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. In the variation effect pattern for use, the reliability for the jackpot gradually increases in the order of “variation effect pattern D028”, “variation effect pattern D031”, and “variation effect pattern D034”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, in “Character notice D”, the reliability gradually increases in the order of “variation effect pattern D028”, “variation effect pattern D031”, and “variation effect pattern D034”. The execution ratio of the notice ("Character notice D1") is high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, any of the “lost” variation effect pattern, the “first jackpot” variation effect pattern, and the “second jackpot” variation effect pattern. The “determination effect D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the “determination effect D2” in which the operation effective period is not set. The execution ratio of “D1” and “Decision effect D2” is set.

As described above, in the changing effects of the effect modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a does not project the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 18A. The state (first state) or the protruding state (second state) is set.
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A to the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A is not performed. The state (second state) is not set.

  In addition, the special effect executed during the variable effect includes a special effect that executes the corresponding effect based on the operation of the first effect button 18A. 1 state) corresponding to “Selif Notice” and “Character Notice” corresponding effects, and the projecting state (second state) corresponding to the first effect button 18A. Correspondence between the “determining effect” (second effect) corresponding effect and the “development notice” executed by operating the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state (first state) or the protruding state (second state). Production is included.

  And in the advance notice (third effect) in the variation effect executed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination that it is determined to be a jackpot, as can be seen from FIG. 44, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. The sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) at a higher rate than the non-projecting state (first state).

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y executes the variation effects of the effect modes B to D in the specific game state (the high probability game state and the short time game state) after the end of the jackpot game. The operational effective period is set during the changing production at a higher rate in the changing production in the production mode C (from the 31st to the 74th fluctuation) than the fluctuation production in the first fluctuation (the first fluctuation to the 30th fluctuation). The operation effective period is set during the change effect at a higher rate in the change effect (changes 75th to 84th) of the effect mode D than the effect.

  The first production button 18A is projected during the fluctuation production at a higher rate in the fluctuation production (the 31st to the 74th fluctuation) in the production mode C than the fluctuation production in the production mode B (1st to 30th fluctuation). The operation effective period to be set to the state (second state) is set, and the change effect of the effect mode D (the 75th to 84th change) is higher during the change effect than the change effect of the effect mode C. An operation effective period in which the 1 effect button 18A is in the protruding state is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the operation effective period, the first effect button 18A as the “first operation means” is set as the “first state” as the “non-projecting state”, and the “second state”. As an example, the “protruding state” is described. However, the “first state” and “second state”, which are the states of the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period, are not limited to the examples in which the positions of the first effect buttons 18A are different, as described above. Any state of the first effect button 18A may be different between the “first state” and the “second state” of the first effect button 18A.

For example, the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is the non-operating state of the first effect button 18A, and the “second state” of the first effect button 18A is the operating state of the first effect button 18A. There may be.
In this case, for example, the first effect button 18A has a structure capable of vibrating operation, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is “non-vibration state” in which the first effect button 18A does not vibrate. Yes, the “second state” of the first effect button 18A may be a “vibration state” in which the first effect button 18A vibrates.
Further, for example, the housing of the first effect button 18A has a structure capable of rotating, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is the “non-rotating state” of the housing. The “second state” of the first effect button 18A may be the “rotation state” of the housing.
Further, for example, the first effect button 18A has a structure in which the rotating body capable of rotating operation is provided inside the housing, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is “non-rotation” of the rotating body. The “second state” of the first effect button 18A may be the “rotation state” of the rotating body.

Further, for example, the light emitting state of the internal LED may be different between the “first state” and the “second state” of the first effect button 18A.
In this case, for example, the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is a “non-lighting state” in which the LED built in the first effect button 18A does not emit light and does not light up. The “second state” may be a “lighting state” in which light is emitted and lighted.
In addition, for example, the first effect button 18A can be lit in a plurality of different colors depending on the light emission color of the internal LED, and the “first state” and “second state” of the first effect button 18A. The first effect button 18A “first state” is the first effect button 18A “blue lighted state” and the first effect button 18A “ The “second state” may be the “state in which the first effect button 18A is lit red”. In addition, the color which this 1st production button 18A lights is not limited to this.

  Further, as the “first operation means”, the second effect button 19A may be applied instead of the first effect button 18A. In this case as well, any state of the second effect button 19A may be different between the “first state” of the second effect button 19A and the “second state”.

For example, the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is the non-operating state of the second effect button 19A, and the “second state” of the first effect button 19A is the operating state of the second effect button 19A. There may be.
In this case, for example, the first effect button 19A has a structure capable of vibrating operation, and the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is “non-vibration state” in which the second effect button 19A does not vibrate. Yes, the “second state” of the second effect button 19A may be a “vibration state” in which the second effect button 19A vibrates.

Further, for example, the light emitting state of the internal LED may be different between the “first state” and the “second state” of the second effect button 19A.
In this case, for example, the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is a “non-lighting state” in which the LED included in the second effect button 19A does not emit light and does not light up. The “second state” may be a “lighting state” in which light is emitted and lighted.
Further, for example, the second effect button 19A can be lit in a plurality of different colors depending on the light emission color of the internal LED, and the “first state” and “second state” of the second effect button 19A are provided. The second effect button 19A may be lit in a different color, and the second effect button 19A may be lit in blue, and the second effect button 19A may be “lighted in blue”. The “second state” may be the “state in which the second effect button 19A is lit red”. In addition, the color which this 2nd production button 19A lights is not limited to this.

  Further, for example, the “first operation means” may be an operation means different from the first effect button 18A and the second effect button 19A.

  For example, the gaming machine Y is provided with an operation lever (not shown) that can be tilted to the near side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, and this operation lever is applied as a “first operation means”. Also good.

  In this case, the operation lever may be in different positions in the “first state” and the “second state”. For example, the “first state” of the operation lever is a “non-tilt state” in which the operation lever is not tilted, and the “second state” of the operation lever is the front side, the back side, the left side, An “inclined state” may be inclined in any direction on the right side. Further, for example, the “first state” of the operation lever is a “first inclination state” in which the operation lever is inclined in any of the front side, the back side, the left side, and the right side. The “second state” may be a “second inclined state” in which the operating lever is inclined in any direction different from the “first inclined state”.

  Further, for example, the operation lever can be vibrated, the “first state” of the operation lever is the “non-vibration state” of the operation lever, and the “second state” of the operation lever is the operation lever. The “vibration state” may be used.

(Second Embodiment)
In the above-described first embodiment, the example in which the state of the operation means that makes the operation effective during the operation effective period during the special effect is set to the “first state” or the “second state” has been described.
In the second embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as “second embodiment”), the operation means that makes the operation effective during the operation effective period during the special effect is “first effect button 18A” or “second effect”. An example of “button 19A” will be described.
In other words, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a replaces the setting contents “specify the operating means in the first state” as the special effects setting contents in the special effects information table stored in the sub ROM. It has a setting content of “selecting the first effect button 18A as an operation means to validate the operation”, and instead of the setting content “put the operation means in the second state”, “activate the operation” It has a setting content of “selecting the first effect button 18A as an operation means”.
In this case, in the operation effective period, regardless of which of the first effect button 18A and the second effect button 19A is enabled, the state remains “first state”.

  FIG. 67 is a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effects that can be executed in the variable effects of effect mode A in the second embodiment. The special effect information table of FIG. 67 is a table used in place of the special effect information table of FIG. 45 in the first embodiment described above, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, which of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 67 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). When the operation effective period is associated with the type of the special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. The type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.
FIG. 67A is a “line notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 67B is a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 67C is an “Development notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “Development notice A” in the production mode A. FIG. 67D is a “determined effect A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in effect mode A.

“Serif notice A1” is a display of an effect image of “Serif a1” “Ippin Senkinja!” On the image display device 14. In this “serif notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 18A is effective (for example, described later). In the operation effective period X ₁₁ ), an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed (the state of the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state). Then, based on the fact that the designated operation is performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect of the content that “Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Ichigo Senkinja!” As “Serif a1”. An image (see (a-1-3) in FIG. 53) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” to “operation position 3” as a movable member. The corresponding production is executed.

  “Serif notice A2” is the same as “Serif notice A1” except that the effect image of “Serif a2”, “Are you getting one hundred?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated. is there.

  “Selif notice A3” is the same as “Serif notice A1” except that the effect image of “Serif a3”, “Is it possible to acquire both?” Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the movable member is not operated. is there.

  “Selif notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, but displays an effect image of “Serif a4” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as “Serif notice A1”.

  “Selif notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, but displays an effect image of “Serif a5” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as “Serif notice A1”.

  44 (a) and 44 (b), in “Serif Notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” is highest in “Serif Notice A1”. The execution rate of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” is set in “Selif Notice A” so as to become lower as it becomes “Selif Notice A2” to “Self Notice A5”.

“Character notice A1” is to display the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y ₁₁ described later), the operation promotion is performed. The notification is not executed (the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state). Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (a-2-3) of FIG. 53) of “Character a2-1” described later is displayed. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A2” is displayed in the same way as “Character a2-1”, except that the effect image “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-3) in FIG. 54) is displayed on the image display device 14. The content of the performance is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A3” is displayed in a manner other than “Character a2-3” (see (c-2-3) in FIG. 55) on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The content of the performance is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, and instead of “Character a2-1”, an effect image of “Character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, and an effect image of “Character notice a2-5” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1” at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in “Character notice A”, “Character notice A1” has the highest expectation level (reliability) for “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5”. The execution ratio of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is set to be higher and lower as “Character notice A2” to “Character notice A5”.

“Development notice A1” is to display the effect image of “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice A1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation becomes effective during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period (for example, described later) in which the operation of the second effect button 19A is enabled. In the operation effective period X ₁₂ ), an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, an effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 53) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period. In addition to the display, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2” is executed.

  “Development notice A2” is the same as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”.

  “Development notice A3” is produced as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  “Development notice A4” is the same as “Development notice A1” except that the operation for the first effect button 18A is validated during the operation valid period.

  “Development notice A5” enables the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”. Except that the movable member is not operated, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice A1”.

  “Development notice A6” validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, displays an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, Except that the movable member is not operated, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice A1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the “development notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpots of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “development notice A1”. The execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” are set so as to be higher and lower as “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.
In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the second effect button 19A is effective at a high rate during the operation effective period in the variable effect that develops from “super reach” to “special reach”. In variable production that does not develop from “super reach” to “special reach”, the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” so that the first production button 18A becomes effective at a high rate during the operation effective period. Is set.

“Decision effect A1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of “flash” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 54). ). In the “decided effect A1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is effective (for example, described later) In the operation effective period X ₂₂ ), an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash light a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  “Decision effect A2” displays an effect image of “flash light a1” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting an operation effective period, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is set to “standby position 1”. Is a notice effect for executing a corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2”.

In this way, the sub CPU 102a selects the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period, and determines the operation type for the selected operation means based on the operation type determination table of the rendering mode A shown in FIG.
FIG. 68 (a) is an operation type determination table in the variation effect pattern for loss in effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 68B is an operation type determination table in the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns of the effect mode A.

For example, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and “fluctuation effect pattern A022” is determined, during the operation effective period of “Selif notice A” and “Character notice A”, the first effect button 18A is “Single stroke” is effective at a rate of 60%, and “Sequential hit” is effective at a rate of 40%.
Note that “single hit” refers to one press operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and “continuous hit” refers to two or more press operations on the second effect button 19A. Note that “secondary hit” may be made by pressing the second effect button 19A a predetermined number of times at least three times.

  Further, in the operation effective period of “Development notice A” when “Fluctuation effect pattern A022” is determined, “Single stroke” is enabled at a rate of 60% when the first effect button 18A is selected, and 40 When the second effect button 19A is selected, “single hit” is enabled at a rate of 40%, and “continuous hit” is enabled at a rate of 60%.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “decided effect A” when “variable effect pattern A026” is determined, “single hit” is made effective at a rate of 30% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 70% With “Strike” enabled.

  Also, for example, during the operation effective period of “Serial notice A” and “Character notice A” when “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” is determined when winning the first jackpot, the first effect button 18A is operated. Only “Single stroke” is valid.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “Development notice A” when “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” is determined, when “First effect button 18A” is selected, only “Single stroke” is enabled, and second effect button 19A is selected. When is selected, only “continuous hit” is valid.

  Further, in the operation effective period of “determined effect A” when “variable effect pattern A038” is determined, only “continuous hit” is enabled for second effect button 19A.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102a, when enabling “single hit” for the first effect button 18A, executes an operation promotion notification for prompting “single hit” for the first effect button 18A. When “continuous hitting” is made effective for the first effect button 18A, an operation promotion notification for prompting “continuous hitting” for the first effect button 18A is executed, and “single hit” is made effective for the second effect button 19A. In the case of performing the operation promotion notification for encouraging “single hit” for the second effect button 19A, and for enabling “continuous hit” for the second effect button 19A, The production control is performed so as to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting "."

  Therefore, the ratio (%) of “single stroke” effective for the first effect button 18A shown in FIG. 68, FIG. 70, FIG. 72, and FIG. This corresponds to the ratio (%) for prompting “single hit”, and the ratio (%) for enabling “continuous hit” for the first effect button 18A is the ratio (%) for prompting “continuous hit” for the first effect button 18A in the operation promotion notification ( %), And the ratio (%) of enabling “single stroke” for the second effect button 19A corresponds to the ratio (%) for prompting “single stroke” for the second effect button 19A in the operation promotion notification. The ratio (%) at which “continuous hit” is made effective for the second effect button 19A corresponds to the ratio (%) for prompting “continuous hit” for the second effect button 19A in the operation promotion notification.

  In this way, the special effect includes a special effect that executes the corresponding effect based on the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A, and the corresponding effect includes the first effect. “Selif notice”, “Character notice” executed based on the operation on the button 18A, “Decision effect” executed based on the operation on the second effect button 19A, and the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A "Development notice" executed by operation is included.

  As shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, and FIG. 50, the advance notice (third effect) in the variation effect that is executed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination that it is determined that the jackpot is determined. The sub CPU 102a selects the second effect button 19A at a higher rate than the first effect button 18A.

In addition, as described above, the sub CPU 102a performs the first operation button 18A as an operation on the first effect button 18A in the operation promotion effect that performs the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A in the change effect. It prompts “single hit” that is an operation type operation or “continuous hit” that is an operation of the second operation type. Further, as the operation on the second effect button 19A, “single hit” that is an operation of the third operation type or “continuous hit” that is an operation of the fourth operation type is prompted.
Then, the sub CPU 102a makes the ratio for prompting the operation of the first operation type different from the ratio for prompting the operation of the second operation type. Further, the sub CPU 102a is configured to make the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type.

  In this operation promotion effect, only the operation of the first operation type is prompted as an operation on the first effect button 18A (100% “single hit”), and only the operation of the fourth operation type is performed as an operation on the second effect button 19A. There is an operation promotion effect that prompts (100% “continuous hit”).

The operations of the first to fourth operation types are not limited to this. The operations of the first operation type and the operations of the second operation type are different, and the operations of the third operation type and the operations of the fourth operation type are different. Any operation may be used as long as they are different.
For example, “single hit” may be used instead of “single hit”, and “long press” may be used instead of “continuous hit”. This “long press” refers to a pressing operation in which, for example, “3 seconds or more” is continuously pressed on the operating means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) whose operation is enabled during the operation effective period. The pressing time for the “long pressing” is not limited to “3 seconds or longer”, and any pressing time may be used.

  FIG. 69 is a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of effect mode B in the second embodiment. The special effect information table of FIG. 69 is a table used in place of the special effect information table of FIG. 47 and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 41, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 69 is executed is shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). When the operation effective period is associated with the type of the special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. The type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.
FIG. 69A is an “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the production mode B. FIG. 69B is a “determined effect B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in the effect mode B.

“Development notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₄₁ described later) for enabling an operation on the second effect button 19A is set, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed. Then, the effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 58) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect such as displaying is executed.

  “Development notice B2” enables the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect b2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect d1”. Except for the above, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice B1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in “Development Notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” is “Development Notice B1”. The execution ratio of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” is set to be higher than “Development Notice B2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the variation effect that develops from “symbol variation” to “special character reach”, the second effect button 19A is displayed in the operation effective period at a high rate during the operation effective period. In the variable production that is effective and does not develop from “symbol fluctuation” to “special character reach”, the “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” are set so that the first production button 18A becomes valid at a high rate during the operation valid period. ”Is set.

The “decision effect B1” is a “decision effect” in which the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved and an effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14 ((e of FIG. 59). See 3-3)). In the “determination effect B1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₅₂ described later), the second effect button 19A is selected. An operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect B2,” the operation effective period is not set, and the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the “standby position 1” as a movable member. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, “decided effect B1” and “decided effect B” are executed so that “decided effect B1” is executed at a higher rate than “decided effect B2” in “decided effect B”. The execution ratio of “B2” is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the operation means selected in this way based on the operation type determination table of the rendering mode B shown in FIG.
FIG. 70A is an operation type determination table in the loss variation effect pattern in effect mode B. FIG. FIG. 70B is an operation type determination table in the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns in the effect mode B.

  For example, in the operation effective period of “development notice B” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and “fluctuation effect pattern B013” is determined, it is 70 when the first effect button 18A is selected. % “Single stroke” is effective, 30% ratio “Consecutive stroke” is enabled, and when the second effect button is selected, “Single shot” is effective 30%, 70% With “Strike” enabled.

  Further, for example, in the operation effective period of “Development notice B” when “Fluctuation effect pattern B019” is determined when winning the first jackpot, “Single stroke” is selected when the first effect button 18A is selected. When the second effect button 19A is selected, only “continuous hit” is enabled.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “Development notice B” when “Fluctuation effect pattern B021” is determined when the first jackpot is won, when the first effect button 18A is selected, the rate is 80%. “Single stroke” is valid, “Consecutive strike” is valid at a rate of 20%, “Single stroke” is valid at a rate of 20% when the second effect button 19A is selected, "Is valid. Further, in the operation effective period of “decided effect B” when “variable effect pattern B021” is determined, “single hit” is made effective at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 80% With “Strike” enabled.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variation effect in effect mode C, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the production mode C. FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 71 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. When the operation effective period is associated with the type of the special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. The type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.

“Development notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 62) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice C1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X _71, which will be described later) for enabling the operation on the second effect button 19A is set, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying the effect image of “effect c1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Development notice C2” enables the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect c2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect c1”. Except for the above, the production contents are the same as “Development notice C1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in the “development notice C”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is “development notice C1”. The execution ratios of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are set to be higher than “development notice C2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the variation effect that develops from “symbol variation” to “attack reach”, the second effect button 19A becomes effective at a high rate during the operation effective period. For variable effects that do not evolve from “change” to “attack reach”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is set so that the first effect button 18A becomes effective at a high rate during the operation valid period. Has been.

“Decision effect C1” moves the first decorative member 17A of the movable member and displays an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see FIG. 62 (g-3-3)). In this “decision effect C1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₇₂ described later) is set. In the operation effective period, an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect C2”, the operation effective period is not set, and the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the “standby position 1” as a movable member. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), “decided effect C1”, “decided effect C1” and “decided effect C1” are executed at a higher rate than “decided effect C2”. The execution ratio of “decision effect C2” is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the operation means selected in this way based on the operation type determination table of the rendering mode C shown in FIG.
FIG. 72A is an operation type determination table in the loss variation effect pattern in effect mode C. FIG. FIG. 72B is an operation type determination table in the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns of the effect mode C.

  For example, if the first effect button 18A is selected during the operation effective period of “development notice C” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and the “variable effect pattern C013” is determined, 70 is selected. % “Single stroke” is effective, 30% ratio “Consecutive stroke” is enabled, and when the second effect button is selected, “Single shot” is effective 30%, 70% With “Strike” enabled.

  Further, for example, in the operation effective period of “Development notice C” when “Fluctuation effect pattern C019” is determined when winning the first jackpot, “Single stroke” is selected when the first effect button 18A is selected. When the second effect button 19A is selected, only “continuous hit” is enabled.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “Development notice C” when “Fluctuation effect pattern C021” is determined when the first jackpot is won, when the first effect button 18A is selected, the rate is 80%. “Single stroke” is valid, “Consecutive strike” is valid at a rate of 20%, “Single stroke” is valid at a rate of 20% when the second effect button 19A is selected, "Is valid. In addition, in the operation effective period of “decided effect C” when “variable effect pattern C021” is determined, “single shot” is valid at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 80%. With “Strike” enabled.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a special effect information table for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing an “development notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice D” in the rendering mode D. FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” in effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, which of the types of special effects set in the table of FIG. 73 is executed is shown in FIGS. When the operation effective period is associated with the type of special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b) stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. The type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.

The “development notice D1” displays an effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 65) on the image display device 14. In this “development notice D1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₁₀₁ described later) for enabling an operation on the second effect button 19A is set, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is performed during the operation effective period. The prompting operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Development notice D2” validates the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and displays an effect image of “effect d2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect d1”. Except for the above, the content of the production is the same as “Development notice D1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the “development notice D1” has a degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2”. The execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set to be higher than “development notice D2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the second effect button 19A is effective at a high rate during the operation effective period in the change effect that develops from “symbol change” to “junken reach”. For variable effects that do not evolve from “change” to “janken reach”, the execution ratios of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” are set so that the first effect button 18A is effective at a high rate during the operation effective period. Has been.

“Character notice D1” is to display the effect image of “Character d1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice D1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, operation effective period Y ₁₀₁ described later), the operation promotion is performed. Notification is not performed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (j-4-2) in FIG. 65) of “character d1” described later is displayed on the image display device. 14 is executed.

  “Character notice D2” is the same as “Character notice D1” except that an effect image of “Character d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”.

  “Character notice D3” is the same as “Character notice D1” except that an effect image of “Character d3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in “Development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3” is the highest in “Character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

“Decision effect D1” moves the first decorative member 17A as the movable member and displays the effect image of “flash d1” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-4) in FIG. 65). ). In the “decided effect D1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and an operation effective period (for example, described later) in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is enabled. In the operation effective period X ₁₀₂ ), an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation being performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect D2” displays an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting an operation effective period, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), “decided effect D1”, “decided effect D1”, “decided effect D1” are executed at a higher rate than “decided effect D2”. The execution ratio of “decision effect D2” is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the operation means selected in this way based on the operation type determination table for the rendering mode D shown in FIG.
FIG. 74A is an operation type determination table in the loss variation effect pattern in effect mode D. FIG. FIG. 74 (b) is an operation type determination table in the big hit and small hit variation effect patterns of the effect mode D.

  For example, in the operation effective period of “development notice D” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and “fluctuation effect pattern D010” is determined, it is 70 when the first effect button 18A is selected. % “Single stroke” is effective, 30% ratio “Consecutive stroke” is enabled, and when the second effect button is selected, “Single shot” is effective 30%, 70% With “Strike” enabled.

  Further, in the operation effective period of “character notice D” when “variable effect pattern D010” is determined, “single hit” is enabled at a rate of 70% as an operation for the first effect button 18A, and a rate of 30% With “Strike” enabled.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “decided effect D” when “variable effect pattern D010” is determined, “single hit” is enabled at a rate of 30% as an operation on second effect button 19A, and a rate of 70% With “Strike” enabled.

  Further, for example, in the operation valid period of “Development notice D” when “Fluctuation effect pattern D019” is determined when winning the first jackpot, “Single stroke” is selected when the first effect button 18A is selected. When the second effect button 19A is selected, only “continuous hit” is enabled. Further, in the operation effective period of “character notice D” when “variable effect pattern D019” is determined, only “single stroke” is enabled as an operation for first effect button 18A. In addition, in the operation effective period of “determined effect D” when “variable effect pattern D019” is determined, only “continuous hit” is enabled as an operation for second effect button 19A.

Further, in the operation effective period of “Development notice D” when “Fluctuation effect pattern D022” is determined when the first jackpot is won, when the first effect button 18A is selected, the rate is 80%. “Single stroke” is valid, “Consecutive strike” is valid at a rate of 20%, “Single stroke” is valid at a rate of 20% when the second effect button 19A is selected, "Is valid.
In addition, in the operation effective period of “Character notice D” when “Fluctuation effect pattern D022” is determined, “Single stroke” is made effective at a rate of 80% with respect to the first effect button 18A, and a rate of 20%. With “Strike” enabled. Further, in the operation effective period of “decided effect D” when “variable effect pattern D022” is determined, “single hit” is made effective at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 80% With “Strike” enabled.

(Production input control processing by the production control board in the second embodiment)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 performed in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a detects the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 based on the pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and the second effect button operation based on the operation of the second effect button 19A. By determining whether or not any of the second effect button operation detection signals from the detection switch 19a is input, it is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated.

  In this step S1401, if the sub CPU 102a determines that any of the operating means has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if it is determined that no operating means has been operated, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is currently being performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1403 to change the special symbol variation. If it is determined that the image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation effect pattern of the variation effect being executed according to the current special symbol variation display stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the variation effect by the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403. If it is determined that it is during the operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S1405. If it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a performs a designation operation on the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) that is enabled in the operation effective period during the operation effective period determined in step S1404 ( It is determined whether or not “single hit” or “continuous hit” has been made.

  In this step S1405, the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation means that is activated in the operation effective period is the first effect button 18A, and the designated operation is “single stroke”, from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11. When the first effect button operation detection signal is input once, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operating means that has been enabled during the operation effective period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 has not been input once, the designation operation to the operation means that is enabled during the operation effective period is performed. Judge that it is not.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a determines that the first effect button operation detection switch is selected when the operation means enabled during the operation effective period is the first effect button 18A and the designated operation is “continuous hit”. By inputting the first effect button operation detection signal from 18a11 twice, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operating means that has been enabled during the operation effective period. On the other hand, since the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 is not input twice, no designation operation is performed on the operation means that is enabled during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a determines that the second effect button operation detection switch is selected when the operation means activated during the operation effective period is the second effect button 19A and the designated operation is “single stroke”. By inputting the second effect button operation detection signal from 19a once, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operating means that has been enabled during the operation effective period. On the other hand, since the second effect button operation detection signal from the second effect button operation detection switch 19a has not been input once, no designation operation has been performed on the operating means that has been enabled during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a determines that the second effect button operation detection switch when the operation means activated during the operation effective period is the second effect button 19A and the designated operation is “continuous hit”. By inputting the second effect button operation detection signal from 19a twice, it is determined that the designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation valid period. On the other hand, since the second effect button operation detection signal from the second effect button operation detection switch 19a is not input twice, the designation operation is not performed on the operation means that is enabled during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In this step S1405, when the designated operation is “continuous hit”, the sub CPU 102a detects a detection signal (first effect button operation detection signal or second effect signal) indicating that the pressed operation of the activated operation means has been detected. Every time a production button operation detection signal) is input, a push operation production designation command for designating production contents corresponding to the depression operation is transmitted to the image control board 105. When the image control board 105 receives the press operation effect designation command from the effect control board 102, the image control board 105 performs control to display an effect image corresponding to the press operation on the image display device 14.

  In step S1405, if the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1405 that a specified operation has been performed on the operation means for which the operation is enabled during the operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S1406, and in the operation effective period. When it is determined that the designated operation is not performed on the validated operation means, the effect input control process is ended.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets the corresponding effect control command for controlling the corresponding effect based on the designated operation to the operation means for which the operation is enabled in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a confirms “variation effect pattern A034” as the variation effect pattern in step S1403 and executes “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a sends a corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and Transmit to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display the effect image of “serif a1” as the corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” to “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation to move to “position 3” is performed.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game effect such as a change effect performed during the change of the special symbol, a jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, or the like is not being played. If it is determined that the game is on standby, the process proceeds to step S1408. If it is determined that the game is not standby, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation means is valid during the game standby, and determines that it is during the operation effective period. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1409, and when it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 102a performs a single operation (1 in the operation effective period) that is a specified operation to the first effect button 18A that is the operation means in which the operation is enabled during the operation effective period determined in step S1408. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation has been performed once.
In this step S1409, when the sub CPU 102a determines that a single stroke, which is a designated operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means for which the operation is enabled, has been made during the operation effective period determined in step S1408. In step S1410, the process proceeds to step S1410. If it is determined that the first effect button 18A is not single-shot, the effect input control process ends.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 102a does not perform the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to perform an operation in the game effect related to the game using the game ball such as the change effect performed during the special symbol change display. Only the first effect button 18A is enabled, and the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A is enabled in the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification is performed.
Further, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period in the standby state.
On the other hand, in the operation effective period in the standby state, the sub CPU 102a restricts the operation on the second effect button 19A from being effective. However, during the display of the menu screen in the standby state, the sub CPU 102a releases the restriction on the operation with respect to the second effect button 19A.

  Hereinafter, an example in which the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A is enabled during the operation effective period during the change effect will be described.

(Example of “variation effect pattern A034”)
In the variation production of “variation production pattern A034”, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the sub CPU 102a displays “Selif notice A” as a special production in “design variation A1-1” in the period (a-1). At this time, effect control is performed so as to execute any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” shown in the serif notice A information table of FIG.

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 11 (2) of FIG. 53, the operation lifetime _{X 11} to set in the "speech announcement A1" - "speech announcement A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( 100% first effect button is selected), second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (Performance ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Variation effect pattern A034” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “line notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A034” in FIG. The designated operation is “single stroke” which is a single press operation.

The sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₁₁ executes a demonstration for displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification to prompt the designation operation to the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) on the image display device 14. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “single hit!” Together with the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge image.
Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A1", based on being the one-base hit for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} "character a1" and "words a1" ( "one 53) (a-1-3) of the state of speaking is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” as a movable member. Effect control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (notice effect) such as moving to “operation position 3”. Note that the sub CPU 102a may execute and control an effect of outputting the voice of “line a1” from the voice output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", as shown in FIG. 67 (a), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} FIG. 53 Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3), the corresponding effect is displayed on the image display device 14 such that the “character a1” speaks “serif a2” (“do you have a hundred cars?”). Control to execute (notice effect).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", as shown in FIG. 67 (a), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} FIG. 53 Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3), a corresponding effect (notice) in which an effect image in which “Character a1” speaks “Serif a3” (“Do you have enough for twelve?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. Control to execute the effect).

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "serif notice A4", if you want to run a "dialogue notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{X 11.} That is, in “Serif notice A4” and “Serial notice A5”, an operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. Effect control is performed so as to execute a notice effect in which an effect image in which “a1” speaks a dialogue is displayed on the image display device 14. Note that the notice effects of “Serif notice A4” and “Serif notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Is controlled to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14 that speaks “Serif a4” (“Do you get one car?”).

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 67A, differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. Is controlled to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14 that speaks “Serif a5” (“Do you earn money?”).

  In the “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect. At this time, the “character notice A1” to “character notice” shown in the character notice A information table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “Aheadline A5” is performed.

As indicated by Y ₁₁ (2) in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A (100%) during the operation effective period Y ₁₁ of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A3”. The first effect button 19A is selected and the second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected) ("Character notice A1" in "Variation effect pattern A034" in FIG. 44B). To “Character notice A3” execution rate, see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “character notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A034” in FIG. The designated operation is “single stroke” which is a single press operation.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} does not perform the operation promoting notification.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A1", based on being the one-base hit for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} as shown in FIG. 53 (a-2-3) In addition, in the image display device 14, a control for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect) such as additionally displaying a new character “Character a2-1” in addition to the already displayed “Character a1”. Do.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in the image display device 14, "Character a2-1" Control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (notice effect) such as “Character a2-2” that is different from the above.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in the image display device 14, "Character a2-1" , A control to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as “Character a2-3” different from “Character a2-2” is additionally displayed.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "Chara notice A4", if you want to run a "character notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{Y 11.} That is, in “Character Notice A4” and “Character Notice A5”, a new character is added at a predetermined timing without displaying an operation promotion notification image as shown in FIG. 53 (a-2-2). The displayed notice effect is executed. The notice effects of “character notice A4” and “character notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a executes a notice effect (corresponding effect) with a content such as displaying an effect image to which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. I do.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a executes a notice effect (corresponding effect) with a content such as displaying an effect image to which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. I do.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A”. At this time, the “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” shown in the development notice A information table of FIG. ”Is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” as “development notice A1” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of “development notice A6” is executed.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A3" is also the operation lifetime _{X 12} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A set, in the case of performing any "development notice A4" - "development notice A6" also sets the operating lifetime X ₁₂ to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A (FIG. 67 (c) refer) .

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 21 (2) of FIG. 53, the operation lifetime _{X 12,} and enable the second performance button 19A at a rate of 50% (selected), the first effect at a rate of 50% Button 18A is enabled. (Execution rate of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6” in “Change effect pattern A034” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67C).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in “Development notice A” associated with “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” in FIG. In this case, the designation operation for the first effect button 18A is “single stroke” as a single pressing operation, and the operation for the second effect button 19A is valid, the designation operation for the second effect button 19A is performed. Is “continuous hit”, which is a pressing operation twice or more.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 12} is (a-3-2) of FIG. 53 or in place of the effect image shown in (a-3-3), specifies the operation to the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) Effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including an operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to perform an operation promotion notification image that prompts a designation operation (continuous hitting) on the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a is, operation and enable the effective period _{X 12} operation of the second performance button 19A in the "development notice A1" - "development notice A3", "battered case!" Along with the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promoting image composed of the characters. On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is operated at effective in the period _{X 12} validates the operation of the first performance button 18A "Development notice A4" - "Development notice A6", whether "one-base hit with the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge Effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including a notification promoting image made up of the characters “!”.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", based on being the battered for a second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 53 As described above, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14 is used. ) Is displayed, and a corresponding production (development notice) is executed.

Sub CPU102a from when running "development announcement A2", based on being the battered for a second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} a second decorative member 17B "standby position 2 ' While moving to “operation position 2”, the image display device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the battered is the second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} second Corresponding effects such as moving the decoration member 17B from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2” and displaying an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B on the image display device 14 ( Control to execute advance notice).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A6", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

(Example of “Variation effect pattern A038”)
In the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A038”, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays “line notice A” as a special effect in “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1). In this case, control is performed to execute any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” shown in the serif notice A information table of FIG.

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 21 (2) of FIG. 54, the operation lifetime _{X 21} to set in the "speech announcement A1" - "speech announcement A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( 100% first effect button is selected), second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (Performance ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Variation effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “line notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A038” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 70% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 30%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _11, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is When “continuous hit” is designated as the designated operation, control is performed to execute the corresponding effects of the above “line advance notice A1” to “line advance notice A3” based on the fact that “continuous hit” is made.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2). Control is executed to execute any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” shown in the character notice A information table 67 (b).

As shown in Y ₂₁ (2) of FIG. 54, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y ₂₁ set in “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A3” ( 100% first effect button is selected), the operation of the second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected) (see “Variation effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B). The execution ratio of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A3” (see FIG. 67B).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “character notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A038” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 70% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 30%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _11, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is When “continuous hit” is designated as the designated operation, the corresponding effects of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” are executed based on the fact that “continuous hit” is made.

  In the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect A”. At this time, the “determination effect A1” and “decision effect A2” shown in the decision effect A information table of FIG. ”Is executed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect A1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 22} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 67 (d)).

As shown in X ₂₂ (2) of FIG. 54, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A (selects the second effect button 100%) in the operation effective period X ₂₂ of the “decision effect A1”. ), The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button is selected) (“decided effect A1”, “decided” in “variable effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B) Execution ratio of effect “A2”, see FIG. 67 (d)).

  The sub CPU 102a then activates the second effect button 19A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “decision effect A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A038” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 30% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 70%.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 22,} instead of the effect image (b-3-2) of FIG. 54, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A 14 Production control is performed so as to be displayed. The operation promotion notification image, together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge, is “single hit!” If the selected designation operation is “single hit”, and “take it continuously!” It consists of letters.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime X _22, the second performance button 19A, to be the selected specified operation ( "one-base hit" or "pummel") Based on this, as shown in (b-3-3) of FIG. 54, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” through the “operation position 1-1” to the image display device 14. Control to move to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front of the screen, and to execute a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1) on the image display device 14. I do.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A2", do not set the operation lifetime _{X 22.} That is, in the “decision effect A2”, the operation promotion notification image as shown in (b-3-2) of FIG. 54 is not displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is “ It is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, and the image display device 14 Control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash a2) is performed.

(Example of “variation effect pattern A042”)
In the variation effect “variation effect pattern A042”, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the sub CPU 102a performs “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1). In this case, any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” shown in the serif notice A information table of FIG. 67A is executed.

As indicated by X ₃₁ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period X ₃₁ set in “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” ( 100% first effect button is selected), second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (Performance ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Variation effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “line notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A042” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 60% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 40%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _31, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is When “continuous hit” is designated as the designated operation, control is performed to execute the corresponding effects of the above “line advance notice A1” to “line advance notice A3” based on the fact that “continuous hit” is made.

The sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₃₁ controls to perform an effect of displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A on the image display device 14. The operation promotion notification image, together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge, is “single hit!” If the designated operation is “single hit”, and “do it continuously!” If the designated operation is “continuous hit”! It consists of letters.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect during “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2). In this case, the sub CPU 102a displays the character notice A information table in FIG. Control to execute any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” shown is performed.

As shown in Y ₃₁ (2) of FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A (100%) during the operation effective period Y ₃₁ of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3”. The first effect button 19A is selected and the second effect button 19A is not activated (the 0% second effect button is selected) (“Character notice A1” in “Variation effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44B). To “Character notice A3” execution rate, see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “character notice A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A042” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 60% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 40%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "character notice A1" - "Character notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime Y _31, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is When “continuous hit” is designated as the designated operation, the corresponding effects of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” are executed based on the fact that “continuous hit” is made.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A” in “super reach A1-1” in the period (c-3). At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays “development notice A” shown in FIG. Control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” as “development notice A1” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of “Development notice A6” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A3" also sets the operating lifetime _{X 32} to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A and, in the case of performing any "development notice A4" - "development notice A6" also sets the operating lifetime X ₃₂ to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A (see FIG. 67 (c)).

As indicated by X ₃₂ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a activates (selects) the second effect button 19A at a rate of 90% during the operation effective period X ₃₂ , and the first effect at a rate of 10%. Button 18A is enabled. (Execution rate of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “variation effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67C).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in “Development notice A” associated with “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” in FIG. If the designated operation on the first effect button 18A is “single hit” at a rate of 60% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 40%, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is valid. The designation operation to the second effect button 19A is “single hit” at a rate of 40% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 60%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1" - "Development notice A6", to the specified operating a "one-base hit" to the second performance button 19A that operate during the operation lifetime X ₃₂ is valid In the case where “single hit” is designated and “continuous hit” is designated as “designated operation”, control for executing the corresponding effects of “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A3” is performed. Do.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4" - "Development notice A6", specifies the operation to "one-base hit" to the first performance button 18A that operate during the operation lifetime X ₃₂ is validated and In response to the “single hit” in the case of “designating operation” and “continuous hitting” in the case of specifying “continuous hit” as the designated operation, the corresponding effects of “advance notice A4” to “advance notice A6” are executed. Take control.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 32,} instead of the effect image shown in (c-3-2) or (c-3-3) in FIG. 55, the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the image or the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a is valid the operation of the second performance button 19A in the operating lifetime _{X 32} in "Development notice A1" - "Development notice A3", together with the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge specification operation " The effect control is performed so that the effect display image including the notification promoting image including the characters “Issue once!” Is displayed on the image display device 14 if the single operation is “Single hit”. .
On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _X "Development notice A4" and enable operation of the first performance button 18A in ₃₂ - "Development notice A6", the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge, designating operation If is “continuous hit”, the effect control is performed so that the effect display image including the notification promoting image made up of the characters “sequentially hit!” Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect A” in the “special reach A1-1” in the period (c-4). At this time, the “decision effect A” shown in the decision effect A information table of FIG. A control for executing one of “A1” and “Decision effect A2” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect A1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 33} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 67 (d)).

As shown by X ₃₃ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A (selects the second effect button 100%) in the operation effective period X ₃₃ of the “decision effect A1”. ), The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button is selected) (“decided effect A1”, “decided” in “variable effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44B) Execution ratio of effect “A2”, see FIG. 67 (d)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “decision effect A” associated with the “variable effect pattern A042” in FIG. In “decided effect A1”, “single hit” is valid at a rate of 40%, and “continuous hit” is valid at a rate of 60%.

Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 33,} instead of the effect image (c-4-2) in FIG. 55, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image, together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge, is “single hit!” If the specified operation is “single hit!”, And “play continuously!” If the specified operation is “continuous hit”. It consists of

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", for the second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime X _33, when the "one-base hit" is the specified operation is "one-base hit", the "barrage" In the case of the designated operation, control for executing the corresponding effect of the above-mentioned “determined effect A1” is performed based on the “sequential hit”.

(Example of “variable effect pattern B019”)
In the variation production of “variation production pattern B019”, as shown in FIG. 57A, the sub CPU 102a displays “Development Notice B” as a special production in “Design Variation B3-1” in the period (d-1). In this case, control is performed to execute either “development notice B1” or “development notice B2” shown in the development notice B information table of FIG.

As indicated by X ₄₁ (2) in FIG. 58, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 10% during the operation valid period X ₄₁ set in the “development notice B1” (10 % Select the first effect button), and activate the operation of the second effect button 19A at a rate of 90% (select the 90% second effect button) (in “variable effect pattern B019” in FIG. 46B). The execution ratio of “Development Notice B1” (see FIG. 69A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “development notice B” associated with the “variable effect pattern B019” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” when the operation is performed, and the designated operation is “continuous hit” when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, to the second performance button 19A the operation is valid, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is Then, the control for executing the corresponding effect of the “development notice B1” described above is performed.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, to the first performance button 18A the operation is valid, that is is a designation operation "one-base hit" Based on this, the control for executing the corresponding effect of the “development notice B2” described above is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 41,} instead of the effect image shown in (d-2-1) of FIG. 58, an effect image or the containing image manipulation promotion notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the 2 effect button 19A is displayed.
Sub CPU102a consists of operation in the effective period _{X 41} to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A "development notice B1", and the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge, the character of "battered case!" The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the notification promoting image is displayed.
On the other hand, sub-CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 41} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A "development notice B2", and the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge, and the character of "one-base hit case!" The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promoting image.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, designating operation for the second performance button 19A (battered) on the basis that is, the special performance symbols reach tilt effect A presentation effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) is displayed on the image display device 14 in a superimposed manner. Take control.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, based on the designation operation for the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) is a special performance symbols reach tilt effect The effect image (effect advance notice) such as displaying the effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having the effect image (effect b2 (orange)) over the image display device 14 is executed. Take control.

(Example of “variable effect pattern B021”)
In the variation effect “variation effect pattern B021”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), “development notice B” as a special effect in “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1). At this time, effect control is performed so as to execute any one of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” shown in the development notice B information table of FIG.

As shown in X ₅₁ (2) of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 5% during the operation valid period X ₅₁ set in the “development notice B1”. The operation of the second effect button 19A is validated at a rate of% (the execution rate of “development notice B1” in “variable effect pattern B021” in FIG. 46B, see FIG. 69A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “development notice B” associated with the “variable effect pattern B021” in FIG. In the case where the designated operation is made “single hit” at a rate of 80%, “continuous hit” is made at a rate of 20%, and when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated, the designated operation is made at a rate of 20%. “Single shot”, and “Consecutive hit” at a rate of 80%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _51, to the second performance button 19A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is "one-base hit When “continuous hit” is designated as the designation operation, control for executing the corresponding effect of the above “development notice B1” is performed based on the “continuous hit”.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, to the first performance button 18A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is When “single hit” is designated as “continuous hit”, the control for executing the corresponding effect of “development notice B2” is performed based on the fact that “single hit” is given.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 51} is (e-2-1) of FIG. 59, instead of the effect image shown in (e-2-2), operating promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the image or the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a is operated in the valid period X ₅₁ validates the operation of the second performance button 19A "Development notice B1", the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge if the designated operation is "one-base hit", " If the designation operation is “continuous hit”, the effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promoting image including the characters “do it continuously!”.
On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is an effective operation of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime _{X 51} in "Development notice B2", the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge specifying operation is "one-base hit" any If the designation operation is “continuous hit”, the effect control is performed so that the effect display image including the notification promoting image including the characters “do it continuously!” Is displayed on the image display device 14.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _51, based on the designation operation of the "one-base hit", and "pummel" is the second performance button 19A, A corresponding effect (development advance notice) such that an effect image ((e-2-3) in FIG. 59) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) is displayed on the image display device 14 superimposed on a special effect design of reach reach effect. Production control is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _51, based on the designation operation of the "one-base hit", and "pummel" is the first performance button 18A, A corresponding effect (development advance notice) such that an effect image ((e-2-3) in FIG. 59) having an effect image (effect b2 (orange)) is displayed on the image display device 14 overlaid on the special effect design of reach reach effect. Production control is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect B” in the “special character reach B2-1” of the period (e-3). At this time, the “decision effect B information table shown in FIG. Control is performed to execute any one of “effect B1” and “decision effect B2”.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect B1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 52} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 69 (b)).

As shown in X ₅₂ (2) of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period X ₅₂ set in the “determination effect B1”, and sets the first effect button 18A. The operation is not validated (the execution ratio of “decided effect B1” in “variable effect pattern B021” in FIG. 46B, see FIG. 69B).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the second effect button 19A for enabling the operation based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “decision effect B” associated with the “variable effect pattern B021” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 20% and “continuous hit” at a rate of 80%.

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 52} is instead effect image (e-3-2) of FIG. 57, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image, together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge, is “single hit!” If the specified operation is “single hit!”, And “play continuously!” If the specified operation is “continuous hit”. It consists of

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect B1", during operation lifetime X _52, to the second performance button 19A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is "one-base hit When “continuous hit” is designated as the designation operation, control for executing the corresponding effect of “determined effect B1” described above is performed based on the “continuous hit”.

  Further, when executing the “decided effect B2”, the sub CPU 102a performs control to execute the corresponding effect of the “decided effect B2” at a predetermined timing.

(Example of “variation effect pattern C019”)
In the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice C” as a special effect in “symbol variation C3-1” as shown in FIG. At this time, control is performed to execute one of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” shown in the development notice C information table of FIG.

As indicated by X ₇₁ (2) in FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 8% (development notice C2) and a rate of 92% during the operation valid period X ₇₁ . Then, the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated (development notice C1) (the execution ratio of “development notice C1” in the “variation effect pattern C019” in FIG. 48B, see FIG. 71A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “development notice C” associated with the “variable effect pattern C019” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” when the operation is performed, and the designated operation is “continuous hit” when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 71,} instead of the effect image shown in (g-2-1) of FIG. 62, an effect image or the containing image manipulation promotion notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the 2 effect button 19A is displayed.
Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period X to validate the operation of the second performance button 19A in ₇₁ "development notice C1", consisting of the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge the character of "battered case!" Notification The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the promotion image is displayed.
On the other hand, sub-CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 71} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A "development notice C2", from the character and that the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge "one-base hit case!" The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the notification promoting image is displayed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C1" during operation lifetime X _71, to the second performance button 19A for validating the operation, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is A corresponding effect (development advance notice) such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is displayed on the image display device 14 overlaid on the special effect design of reach reach effect. ) Is executed.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C2", during operation lifetime X _71, to the first performance button 18A for validating the operation, based on being is the designated operation "one-base hit" A corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c2 (red)) superimposed on the special effect design of reach reach effect on the image display device 14 ( Control to execute advance notice).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” in the “attack reach C1-1” of the period (g-3). At this time, the “decision effect C” shown in the decision effect C information table of FIG. Control to execute either “C1” or “Decision effect C2” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect C1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 72} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 69 (b)).

As shown in X ₇₂ (2) of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period X ₇₂ set in the “decision effect C1”, and sets the first effect button 18A. The operation is not validated (the execution ratio of “decided effect C1” in “variable effect pattern C019” in FIG. 48B, see FIG. 71B).

The sub CPU102a, based on the selection percentage of the operation type in the associated with the "variation demonstration pattern C019" in FIG. ₇₂ (b) "decided effect C", the second performance button 19A for validating the operation The designated operation is “continuous hit”.

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 72} is instead effect image (g-2-1) of FIG. 62, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A 14 is displayed. This operation promotion notification image is made up of the characters “Let's strike continuously!” Together with the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge image.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect C1" during operation lifetime X _72, to the second performance button 19A the operation is valid, based on the "pummel" is, the above " Control for executing the corresponding effect of “determination effect C1” is performed.

  Further, when executing the “decided effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a performs control to execute the corresponding effect of the “determined effect C2” at a predetermined timing.

(Example of “variation effect pattern D019”)
In the variation effect “variation effect pattern D019”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” as a special effect in “symbol variation D1-1” as shown in FIG. At this time, control is performed to execute either “development notice D1” or “development notice D2” shown in the development notice D information table of FIG.

As shown in X ₁₀₁ (2) of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 8% during the operation valid period X ₁₀₁ (development notice D2), and a rate of 92% Then, the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated (development notice D1) (execution ratio of “development notice D1” in “variation effect pattern D019” in FIG. 50B, see FIG. 73A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “development notice D” associated with the “variable effect pattern D019” in FIG. The designated operation is “single hit” when the operation is performed, and the designated operation is “continuous hit” when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated.

Sub CPU102a is operated in the effective period X ₁₀₁ may effect image including operation promoting notification image prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A or a production which includes an image of operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A Production control is performed to display an image.
Sub CPU102a is, in operation effective period _{X 101} when you run the "development notice D1" to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A is, that the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge "battered case!" An effect image including a notification promoting image composed of characters is displayed. On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, in operation valid period _{X 101} when running "development notice D2" to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A, whether the image and a "one-base hit in the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge! The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promoting image including the characters "".

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D1", during operation lifetime X _101, with respect to the second performance button 19A for validating the operation, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is A corresponding effect (development advance notice) such that an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 65) having an effect image (effect d1 (blue)) is displayed on the image display device 14 superimposed on a special effect design of reach reach effect. ) Is executed.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D2", during operation lifetime X _101, relative to the first performance button 18A for validating the operation, based on being is the designated operation "one-base hit" Thus, an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 65) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) superimposed on the special effect design of reach reach effect is displayed on the image display device 14 ( Control to execute advance notice).

  Further, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice D” as a special effect during the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a displays the character notice D information table in FIG. 73 (b). Control is performed to execute any one of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” shown.

As shown in Y ₁₀₁ (2) of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A (100%) during the operation valid period Y ₁₀₁ of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3”. The first effect button 19A and the second effect button 19A are not enabled (0% second effect button) (“Character notice D1” to “Character notice” in “Variation effect pattern D019” in FIG. 50B). D3 "execution rate, see FIG. 73 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a selects the first effect button 18A in which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “character notice D” associated with the “variable effect pattern D019” in FIG. The designated operation is “single stroke”.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice D1" - "character notice D3" for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101,} based to be is the designated operation "one-base hit", Control for executing the corresponding effects of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “determination effect D” in the second half of the period (j-4). At this time, the “determination effect D1” and “determination effect D2” shown in the determination effect D information table of FIG. The control which performs either of these is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect D1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 102} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 64 (a)).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _{X 102} (2) of FIG. 65, the operation lifetime _{X 102} of the "demonstration D1 determined" means that the active and then (100% second performance button) the operation of the second performance button 19A, The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button) (“decision effect D1” and “decision effect D2” in the “variation effect pattern D019” in FIG. 50B). Execution rate, see FIG. 73 (c)).

  The sub CPU 102a then activates the second effect button 19A based on the operation type selection ratio in the “decision effect D” associated with the “variable effect pattern D019” in FIG. The designated operation is “sequential hit”.

Sub CPU102a is operated at effective period _{X 102} may instead effect image (j-4-3) of FIG. 65, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is made up of the characters “Let's strike continuously!” Together with the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge image.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect D1", during operation lifetime _{X 102,} the second performance button 19A, to be the selected specified operation ( "one-base hit" or "pummel") Based on this, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 65, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” through the image display device 14. Control to move to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front of the screen, and to execute a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1) on the image display device 14. I do.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect D2", without setting the operation lifetime X _102, at a predetermined timing, "operating position of the first decorative member 17A from the" standby position 1 "as a movable member A corresponding effect (decision effect) is executed such that the image display device 14 displays a flash effect image (flash a2) while moving to “operation position 1-2” via “1-1”.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A as the first operation means or the second effect button 19A as the second operation means. In the operation effective state in which the predetermined effect according to the operation is executed and the operation promotion notification is not performed based on the operation performed on the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A in the operation effective state to be performed. In a certain second operation valid state, even if an operation is performed on the first effect button 19A, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and the second effect button 19A is operated. The predetermined effect according to the operation is not executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a performs the advance notice (third effect) in the change effect executed based on the determination of the big hit at a higher rate than the first effect button 18A. The second effect button is selected.

  Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a prompts an operation of the first operation type or an operation of the second operation type as an operation on the first effect button 18A in the operation promotion effect, and the second effect. As an operation for the button 19A, the operation of the third operation type or the operation of the fourth operation type is prompted, the ratio of prompting the operation of the first operation type is different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type, and the third operation The ratio that prompts the operation of the type is different from the ratio that prompts the operation of the fourth operation type.

  In the second embodiment, the operation on the “first effect button 18A” as the “first operation means” or the “second effect button 19A” as the “second operation means” is effective during the operation effective period. An example was described. However, the “first operation means” and the “second operation means” are not limited to this.

  For example, the “first operation means” may be the “second effect button 19A” and the “second operation means” may be the “first effect button 18A”.

  Alternatively, either the “first operation means” or the “second operation means” may be the above-described operation lever (not shown). In this case, as the operation on the operation lever, the first operation type operation and the second operation type operation are different operations, and the third operation type operation and the fourth operation type operation are different operations. For example, the operation of the first operation type is a tilt operation toward the front side, the operation of the second operation type is a tilt operation toward the back side, the operation of the third operation type is a tilt operation to the left side, and the fourth operation type This operation may be a tilting operation to the right.

  As described above, in the second embodiment of the present invention, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A during the execution of the game effect related to the game. In the operation effective state to be performed, the effect control is performed so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment of the present invention, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation based on the operation being performed on the first effect button 18A in the operation enabled state during the standby state in which no game effect is being executed. A predetermined effect according to the operation is executed, and even if an operation is performed on the second effect button 19A, execution of the predetermined effect according to the operation is restricted.
However, as described in the description using FIGS. 37 and 38 of the first embodiment, the image is obtained by pressing the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period of the first effect button 18A in the standby state. When the menu screen is displayed on the display device 14, the operation of the second effect button 19A or the operation lever instead of this becomes effective.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and the second state different from the first state The operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to (protrusion (or vibration, red, etc.)), and this operation means is operated during the operation valid state that enables the operation on the operation means. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the effect control means, in which the effect control means is in an operation-effective state in which an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the operation means. In the first operation valid state, the operation means is in the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed, the operation means is set in the first state. The second state is not set

  As described above, the gaming machine Y changes the state of the operation means between the first operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the operation means and the second operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It offers a variety of different productions.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, the first operation means (effect button (or first effect button or the like)), and the second operation means different from the first operation means. (Operating lever (or second effect button or the like)) and the first operating means or the second operating means being operated during the operation valid state in which the operation on the first operating means or the second operating means is enabled. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means performs an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means. In the first operation effective state, which is the operation effective state, based on the operation performed on the first operation means or the second operation means, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed and the operation promotion notification is not performed. The second operation valid state that is the operation valid state In step (b), a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation on the first operation means, and a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed even if the second operation means is operated. Do not run.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means is performed and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It provides a variety of effects with different operation means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) is different from the first state (protruding). (Or vibration, red, etc.) based on the operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed, and the operation means being operated during the operation valid state that enables the operation on the operation means. An effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means is an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game. In the first operation effective state, which is the operation effective state for performing the notification, in the second operation effective state, which is the operation effective state, in the standby state in which the operating means is in the first state or the second state and the game effect is not executed. The operation means is set to the first state. Limits to a second state.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the state of the operation means is different between the second operation effective state and the inside.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, the first operation means (effect button (or first effect button or the like)), and the second operation means different from the first operation means. (Operating lever (or second effect button or the like)) and the first operating means or the second operating means being operated during the operation valid state in which the operation on the first operating means or the second operating means is enabled. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means provides the player with the first operation means or the second operation during the execution of the game effect related to the game. In the first operation effective state, which is an operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the device, a predetermined operation corresponding to the operation is performed based on the operation performed on the first operation device or the second operation device. Directing and executing game effects In the second operation effective state, which is the operation effective state during the standby state, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation on the first operation means, and the second operation means Even if the operation is performed, the execution of a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is restricted.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the operation means used for executing a predetermined effect is different from the second operation effective state in the middle.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game by the determination means. Is determined to execute the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, and can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) Based on the operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to a second state (protrusion (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, and the determination result by the determination means, A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a change effect using an effect symbol for notification, wherein the effect control means has a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated in the change effect. Production can be performed The predetermined effects include a first effect executed by an operation on the operation means in the first state, a second effect executed by an operation on the operation means in the second state, and the operation in the first state or the second state. A third effect that is executed by an operation on the means is included, and in the third effect in the variable effect that is executed based on the determination that the special game is executed by the determination unit, the operation unit is set to the first state. The second state is set at a higher rate.

  Thus, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the state of the operation means used when executing the third effect at a rate corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. .

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether the special game is played by the determination unit. When it is determined to be executed, special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, first operation means (effect button (or first effect button or the like)) that can be operated by the player, and Based on the second operation means (operation lever (or second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means and the determination result by the determination means, a variation effect using the effect symbol for informing the determination result is performed. An effect control means is a gaming machine provided with effect control means (sub CPU), and the effect control means can execute a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the variable effect. , Prescribed The effect is executed by a first effect executed based on an operation on the first operation means, a second effect executed based on an operation on the second operation means, and an operation on the first operation means or the second operation means. The third operation is selected at a higher rate than the first operation means in the third effect in the variation effect that is executed based on the determination that the special game is executed by the determination means. Is done.

  Thus, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the selection ratio of the operation means used when executing the third effect according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

  ◇ In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game by the determination means. Is determined to execute the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, the first operation means (effect button (or first effect button or the like)) that can be operated by the player, and Based on the determination result by the second operation means (operation lever (or second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means and the determination means, a variation effect using an effect symbol for informing the determination result is provided. The effect control means includes a first operation means or a second operation in an operation promotion effect that prompts an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in a variable effect. hand A predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the first operation type, and an operation of the first operation type or an operation of the second operation type different from the first operation type is performed as an operation on the first operation means in the operation promotion effect. The operation of the third operation type or the operation of the fourth operation type different from the operation of the third operation type as the operation on the second operation means, and the ratio of prompting the operation of the first operation type, The ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type is different, and the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type is different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type.

  Thus, when the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect, the operation on the first operation means is performed in the operation promotion effect. The operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different ratios, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different ratios as operations for the second operation means. Provides a variety of operational promotion effects.

  The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion effect that prompts only an operation of the first operation type as an operation for the first operation means and prompts only an operation of the fourth operation type as an operation for the second operation means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether the special game is executed by the determination means. A special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game by determining to execute, and a specific game for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state after the special game is finished Based on the state setting means (main CPU), the operation means that can be operated by the player (such as an effect button), and the determination result by the determination means, a variation effect using an effect symbol for informing the determination result is provided. An effect control means is a gaming machine having an effect control means (sub CPU) to be operated, wherein the effect control means is operated in an operation valid state in which an operation on the operation means in a variable effect is valid. Based on the predetermined effect, the variable effect is being performed in the second period after the first period in the specific gaming state at a higher rate than the first period in the specific gaming state after the end of the special game. Set the operation valid state to.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting production such that the production using the operating means increases as the specific gaming state after the special game ends.

  This operation means can change between a first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (protruding (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, The means sets the operation valid state in which the operation means is in the second state in the second period at a higher rate than the first period.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting production such that the production using the operation means that becomes the second state increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is finished, the specific game advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state). A state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. It was described as “ST machine”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or the high probability gaming state continues, for example, 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal jackpot” in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a low probability gaming state.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period during which the special symbol after the jackpot game is fluctuated from 1 to 99 times is referred to as the “first period” described above, and the jackpot game The period in which the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol is 100 times or more may be set as the “second period”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period during the variation effect in the “second period” at a higher rate than the “first period”.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a jigyan ball gaming machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 big winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decorative member (Movable member)
17B Second decorative member (movable member)
17C Third decorative member (movable member)
18A First effect button (first operation means)
19A Second effect button (second operation means)
70 Second starting port control device 80 Big prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

Claims (2)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on establishment of the start condition;
Special game control means for executing the special game by determining that the special game is executed by the determination means;
A first operating means that can be operated by a player, and a second operating means different from the first operating means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, an effect control means for performing a variation effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result,
The production control means includes
A predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the variation effect,
In the operation promotion effect,
As an operation for the first operation means, an operation of the first operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is prompted,
As an operation for the second operation means, an operation of a third operation type or an operation of a fourth operation type different from the operation of the third operation type is prompted,
Differentiating the ratio of prompting the operation of the first operation type from the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type;
A gaming machine, wherein a ratio of prompting an operation of the third operation type is different from a ratio of prompting an operation of the fourth operation type. The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion effect that prompts only an operation of the first operation type as an operation on the first operation means and prompts only an operation of the fourth operation type as an operation on the second operation means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: